JP6537569B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachislot having a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player after game media such as medals and coins have been inserted into the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "start operation"), and all reels are rotated. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that the player has pressed a stop button provided corresponding to each reel (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. Do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery processing") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") Stop the rotation of the reel based on the timing of the stop operation). Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, a bonus corresponding to the combination of the symbols is given to the player. In addition, as an example of the benefit granted to the player, the payout of gaming media (such as medals) (hereinafter referred to as "small part"), re-game where the internal lottery processing is performed again without consuming the gaming media (following , Also called “replay”, the operation of a bonus game in which the opportunity for paying out game media is increased, and the like.

  In addition, the pachi slot of the above configuration is usually provided with rendering devices such as a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, a speaker, etc., for performing various renderings in accordance with the above-described game-related operations. Furthermore, in recent years, pachislot machines equipped with features (hereinafter referred to as movable features) driven by using a motor or a solenoid have been increasing as effects devices, as in the case of gaming machines called pachinko. In the effect using the movable character, a method of driving the movable character by operating a member attached to a motor or a solenoid by a gear or a cam is generally used. However, with the increasing tendency of pachislots equipped with movable parts, not only the driving time of the movable parts is increased, but also the actions of the movable parts are diversified, and as a result, the opportunity for failure of the movable parts is increased. ing.

  Therefore, various measures have been conventionally proposed in the case where an abnormality occurs in the operation of the movable part (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Patent Document 1 proposes a method for simplifying the return process by selecting the return position of the movable role from a plurality of specific return positions provided in advance when the error of the movable role is restored. .

JP, 2012-187131, A

  As described above, conventionally, various measures have been proposed in the case where an abnormality occurs in the operation of the movable combination in the gaming machine provided with the movable combination. However, when a serious abnormality occurs in the movable part, a load is further applied to the motor and the solenoid, which leads to a fatal failure for the gaming machine. Also, conventionally, in a gaming machine provided with movable features, the guide menu is prevented from overlapping with the movable features as viewed from the player side, and the guide is conducted under simple conditions without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. There is a need for a gaming machine capable of displaying a menu.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and the object of the present invention is to prevent the guide menu from overlapping with the movable character, as seen from the player side, to make the player feel uncomfortable. It is providing a gaming machine capable of displaying a guide menu on simple conditions without giving.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A control unit (for example, a sub-substrate 32 described later) that performs control relating to a game effect;
A display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) for displaying an image;
Movable decorative parts (for example, a left movable unit 106 and a right movable unit 107 described later) which are disposed on a part of the player's side of the display screen of the display device in a superimposed manner and perform a predetermined movement operation;
Operation means for receiving the operation of the player (for example, a SELECT button 19A or an ENTER button 19B described later);
The control unit has control means (for example, a sub control circuit 42 described later) which determines the effect of the game and controls the operation of the determined effect.
The movable decorative portion has position detection means for detecting the position of the movable decorative portion by one or more sensors (for example, a left door and a right door combination product origin sensor described later),
The control means
Start-up operation check means for checking the operation of the movable decorative portion when the control unit is started;
Guidance information display means (for example, a guide menu main process described later) capable of displaying guidance information on the game content on the display device when the operation of the player is detected by the operation means;
And position determining means for determining the position of the movable decorative portion according to the state of the sensor of the position detecting means.
The guidance information display means is
When the operation means of the player is detected by the operation means, the guidance information is not displayed on the display device, and the state of the sensor of the position detection means indicates the guidance information on the display device If it is not possible, the guidance information is not displayed on the display device.
When the operation means of the player is detected by the operation means, the guidance information is not displayed on the display device, and the state of the sensor of the position detection means indicates the guidance information on the display device If possible, the guidance information is displayed on the display device ;
The gaming machine characterized in that the state where the state of the sensor of the position detection means can not display the guidance information on the display device includes a state where it is determined that the movable decorative portion is abnormal .

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the activation time operation confirmation means moves the movable decoration portion with the exclusive-use article movable data for confirming the operation of the movable decoration portion only once at the time of activation. after completion of the movement, when a state of the sensor in which one or more states of all sensors of said position detecting means is determined to a normal position, the operation of the movable decoration is determined to have completed successfully When an abnormality is detected even in one of the one or more sensor states of the position detection means, it may be determined that the operation of the movable decorative portion has not ended normally .

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the control means is movable data for causing the item movable data to move the guide information to a position where the display device can display when the moving operation of the movable decorative portion ends. In addition, the movable decorative portion is moved by the accessory movable data, and the state of the sensor of the position determination unit at the end of the moving operation of the movable decorative portion can display the guidance information on the display device. If not, it may further include correction moving means for moving the movable decorative portion to a position where the guidance information can be displayed on the display device.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by preventing the guide menu (guidance information) from overlapping the movable combination (the movable decoration portion) when viewed from the player side. The guide menu can be displayed under simple conditions.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the vicinity of a liquid crystal display device of a game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an entire configuration of a circuit included in a game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub control circuit in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front panel in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the right movable unit (right door combination) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right movable unit (right door combination) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door combination) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door combination) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door combination) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the door combination thing movable data table referred by various operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door combination thing) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the guide menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of a central movable unit (central character) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the center movable unit (central character) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the center movable unit (central character) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the center movable unit (central character) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a general | schematic front block diagram of liquid crystal display device vicinity at the time of completion | finish operation | movement of the protrusion operation | movement of the center movable unit (central combination) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the central prize movable data table referred by various operation | movement of the central movable unit (central goods) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of bonus operation in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 35 shows an example of a general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) for CB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for a rotation stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initialization setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 1st stop at the time of the forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table of 2nd * 3rd stop at the time of the order push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular pushing time stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table (except at the time of MB action | operation) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table (at the time of MB (CB) operation | movement) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table in the continuous lock state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storing area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the action | operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (in non-MB) of the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (in MB) of the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer form in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of RT gaming state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the table | surface which put together the starting conditions and completion | finish conditions of each RT gaming state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in decision screen) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus completion waiting) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in rocket) table in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an XR lottery (normal) table according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART) table (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (during ART preparation) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in determination screen) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in waiting for pseudo | simulation bonus completion) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (simulation bonus winning time) table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (simulation bonus winning time) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (simulation bonus winning time) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of the prescription | regulation game in NRB achievement) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of the SRB middle prescription game achievement) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of XBB continuation) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of BG challenge success) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of XR lottery game number table (1) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table in BB (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (the 3) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NRB in XR lottery game number table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number table of XR lottery games during SRB in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a don match permission flag table (1) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table in BB (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 3) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 4) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 5) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 6) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 7) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 8) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don match permission flag table (the 9) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XBB continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of XBB continuation XBB stock table in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NRB in-navi addition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of NRB forced shortening lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of- SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-SRB in-game addition lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-ARTs ART lottery game number table lottery table in SRB start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer (at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus completion) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer (at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus completion) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer (at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus completion) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR content lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR basic G number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR basic G number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR addition additional table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo bonus lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 6) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling mode transfer lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling mode transfer lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival direct transition lottery (in ART) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival direct transition lottery (in XR) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of XR carnival addition addition 1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of XR carnival addition addition 2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocket mode transfer lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocket mode continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the loop lottery table at the time of ART completion in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge content lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge content lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navi lottery (normal) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (normal) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navi lottery (normal) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (normal) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navi lottery (ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (ART) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (RB transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (RB transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (RB transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (RB transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (red 7 * Don BB transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (red 7 * Don BB transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (red 7 * Don BB transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (red 7 * Don BB transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 0) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 0) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 0) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navi lottery (presentation state 0) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (effect state 1) table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 1) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 1) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (effect state 1) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 2) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 2) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 2) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigator lottery (presentation state 2) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navi lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (during ART preparation) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (during ART preparation) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (during ART preparation) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigator lottery (during ART preparation) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number random determination (medium) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (simulation | bonus bonus completion) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (simulation | bonus bonus completion) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number random determination | lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number lottery (in ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number lottery (in ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (in ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (at the time of ART completion | finish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance / start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the winning number correction process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game lock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop initialization process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing-in priority storing process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop button detection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number determination process of sliding symbols in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the priority attraction-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd after-stop control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of RT control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus end check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of at the time of game end production control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus operation check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the interrupt processing by control of main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of the power activation of sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-off interruption process of sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of medal insertion command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of start command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of the display command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal middle processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal middle state transition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a normal (winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during ART preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (pricing) during ART preparation in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing (1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing (2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (in the 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of XR discharge | emission in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of state transition processing during ART in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (a prize) in ART in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (1) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (in 2) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 3) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (winning) in XR in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in XRC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing during a rocket (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing (the 2) in the rocket in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in BGZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during BGZ (at the time of winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during the confirmation screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (winning) in a confirmation screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during BB in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in NRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in XBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under waiting of a false bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (winning) during pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing at the time of the completion | finish of a pseudo | simulation bonus (at the time of a prize) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory launch test process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows one structural example of the error information log | history screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory operation monitoring process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the item operation start monitoring process (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the item operation start monitoring process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory operation end monitoring process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the guide menu main process in one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating establishment of a specific small combination with a lamp or the like, and a winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot equipped with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which a game state higher than normal operation is activated, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") simultaneously operated .

<Function flow>
First, referring to FIG. 1, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to the medals, for example, coins, gaming balls, point data or tokens for gaming may be applied as gaming media.

  When a player inserts a medal into a pachislot and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitting display along an effective line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to "winning" in which a player is given a benefit such as payout of medals, activation of replay (replay), activation of bonus, etc. Those concerned are provided.

  In addition, when the start lever is operated, rotation of the plurality of reels is performed. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a prescribed time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within this prescribed time is referred to as the “number of sliding symbols”. Then, in the present embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum sliding symbol number) is determined to be four symbols, and when the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding symbol The number is set to one pattern.

  When an internal winning combination that permits combination display of symbols relating to winning is determined, the reel stop control means normally sets the combination of symbols to the effective line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for four symbols of symbols). Stop rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 at the time of operation of “MB” (middle bonus) for continuously operating a second type special service, a challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and “CB”. The rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a prescribed time of 75 msec (for one symbol) for three or more reels. Furthermore, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line by using various prescribed times corresponding to the gaming state. Let

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the prize determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line relates to a prize. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined that the combination of the displayed symbols relates to winning by the winning determination means, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of such flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game).

  Further, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of game operation flows, display of an image performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, output of light performed by various lamps, output of sound performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof Various effects are performed using it.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, referred to as a random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub control circuit described later.

  Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means responds to each trigger at the start of rotation of the reel, at the time of rotation stop of each reel, at the time of determination of presence or absence of winning, etc. Run. Thus, in Pachislot, the player has an opportunity or opportunity to know the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the presentation content associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest can be improved.

<Structure of Pachislot>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the structure of the pachi slot according to the present embodiment will be described. In addition, the pachislot of this embodiment functionally mainly includes various operations related to the progress of the game and a main control unit that controls the various operations, a sub control unit that performs the rendering of the game, and the main control It is comprised by the game machine case part for mounting a part and a sub control part. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main substrate) described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, etc.) connected thereto. Further, the sub control unit includes a sub control circuit (sub substrate) described later and various peripheral devices (a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, a lamp, various movable objects, and the like) controlled by the sub control circuit. The contents of each component will be described more specifically below.

[Appearance structure]
First, the external structure of the pachi slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi slot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen of the pachi slot 1.

  The pachi slot 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine casing) as shown in FIG. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a which accommodates a reel, a circuit board and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be able to open and close.

  Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 7 on one side is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is composed of a concave member, and the operator's hand is put on the handle 7 when transporting the pachislot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 described later, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variation display devices) are provided inside the cabinet 2a, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are in the lateral direction (reel In a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation of Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the circumferential surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn along the circumferential direction (rotational direction of the reel), and the symbols adjacent to each other along the arrangement direction of the symbols are arranged at predetermined intervals. Ru.

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3), and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be able to open and close using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door main body 9 when the door main body 9 is viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 (display device, notification means) is attached to the upper part of the door main body 9, and executes effects by displaying an image. As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 is a display unit including three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R for displaying the symbols drawn on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R respectively. Display screen 11a is provided. In the present embodiment, an image is displayed and effects are performed using the entire display unit 11a including the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  The three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of, for example, a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions overlapping the arrangement areas of the three reels as viewed from the front (the player side), and are positioned in front of the three reels (the player side) Provided to Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind them through the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows is stopped, three of the plurality of symbols (arranged) drawn (arranged) on each reel are continuously arranged. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. Therefore, in the frame of each display window, as shown in FIG. 3, upper, middle and lower symbol display areas (hereinafter referred to as upper area, middle area and lower area respectively) are provided for each reel, One symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. That is, symbols are displayed in a 3 × 3 array form in the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. In this embodiment, the middle reel region of the left reel 3L, the middle reel region of the middle reel 3C, and the line (center line) connecting the middle reel region of the right reel 3R are defined as effective lines for determining whether or not winning is achieved. Do.

  The front panel 10 is attached so as to cover the peripheral portion of the display screen (display portion 11a) of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the upper portion of the door main body 9, and is disposed overlapping on the front surface of the display portion 11a. Ru. Then, the front panel 10 has a decorative frame 101 in which a panel opening 101 a for exposing a necessary display screen area in the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display 11 is formed, and a transparent protective cover 102 that closes the panel opening 101 a of the decorative frame 101. (See FIG. 2).

  Further, the decoration frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and switches for presentation 22L and 22R (hereinafter referred to as a switch for left presentation 22L and a switch for right presentation 22R).

  The lamp group 21 includes, for example, a lamp 21a provided on the left side of the decoration frame 101 and a lamp 21b provided on the right side of the decoration frame 101 as viewed from the player (see FIG. 3). Each of the lamps constituting the lamp group 21 is constituted by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and lights and extinguishes light in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the left effect switch 22L is provided on the left side of the decoration frame 101 when viewed from the player, and at the lower left corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player. Be placed. On the other hand, the right effect switch 22R is provided on the right side of the decoration frame 101 when viewed from the player, and is disposed at the lower right corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player. The left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R are switches that are selectively pressed and operated by the player in the case of a two-off effect called “belieget challenge” described later.

  Furthermore, the movable frame (movable decorative portion) is attached to the decorative frame 101. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are attached to the decoration frame 101 as movable articles.

  The central movable unit 105 is disposed at a central portion near the upper end in the decoration frame 101 and has a movable part 309. The central movable unit 105 is drive-controlled, for example, when a specific effect is performed, and the movable part 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) is positioned approximately at the center of the front surface of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Moving. The configuration of the central movable unit 105 and the rendering operation using the central movable unit 105 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  The left movable unit 106 is disposed near the left end in the decoration frame 101 and has a left door 188. The right movable unit 107 is disposed near the right end in the decoration frame 101 and has a right door 189. When a predetermined effect is performed using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, drive control is performed so that the left door 188 and the right door 189 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) are opened. The configurations of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 and the rendering operation using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, an example of effect of simultaneously driving the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is driven. You may provide a rendering operation to be controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the lumbar panel 12 is provided substantially at the center of the door body 9, and a pedestal 13 is formed on the lumbar panel 12. The pedestal unit 13 includes various devices to be operated by the player (the medal insertion slot 14, the MAX bet button 15A, the 1 BET button 15B, the start lever 16, the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the clearing button 18, A SELECT button 19A, an ENTER button 19B, etc.) are provided.

  The medal insertion slot 14 is provided to receive a medal dropped from the outside into the pachislot 1 by the player. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 14 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3) set in advance as the upper limit, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot 1 Can (so-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 15A and the 1 BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Further, the settlement button 18 is provided to pull out (discharge) the medal deposited inside the pachislot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The SELECT button 19A and the ENTER button 19B mainly operate to display various guidance information such as a guide menu on the display unit 11a (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display device 11, and select a predetermined menu item from the guide menu. At the time of play, the player performs a pressing operation.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 5) formed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). Digitally display

  At the lower part of the door main body 9, a medal payout port 24, a medal receiving tray 25, two speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides the medals discharged by the driving of a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal receiver 25 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. The two speakers 20L and 20R output sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effect.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the internal structure of the pachi slot 1 and shows a state when the front door 2b is opened to the cabinet 2a.

  The cabinet 2a is formed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like member in which one surface of the front side (the front door 2b side) is opened.

  In the vicinity of the upper end portion in the cabinet 2a, a main substrate 31 on which a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 5) described later is mounted is provided. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit for controlling the main operation of the game in the pachislot 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of internal winning combinations, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described in detail later.

  A reel unit including a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C and a right reel 3R is provided in the vicinity of a central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 4, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 5) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  Near the lower end in the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and capable of discharging them one by one is provided. In the vicinity of the lower end in the cabinet 2a, a power supply 34 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachi slot 1 is provided on one side (left in the example shown in FIG. 4) of the hopper 33. Be

  In the vicinity of the upper end portion on the back surface side (the side opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b, a sub-substrate 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) described later is mounted is provided. The sub control circuit 42 (sub control means) receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41, determines the effect of the game by the display of the video and the like based on the received command data, It is a circuit that controls the operation of the effect. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described in detail later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided in the vicinity of a substantially central portion on the back side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) are appropriate. Guide to Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 5) is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35, for detecting that the appropriate medal has passed.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachi slot 1. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the sub control circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the pachi slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 mainly includes a microcomputer 50 mounted on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Including 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate (generate) clock pulses. Then, the main CPU 51 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates a random number (for example, 0 to 65535) within a predetermined range. Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and various sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. Main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like, and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R. Although not shown in FIG. 5 in order to simplify the description, in the present embodiment, the player presses the SELECT switch for detecting that the player has pressed the SELECT button 19A, and the ENTER button 19B. An ENTER switch is also provided to detect operation.

  The stop switch 17S (stop operation detection means) detects that the player has pressed the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detection means) detects that the player has operated the start lever 16 (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the player has pressed the bet button (the MAX bet button 15A or the 1 BET button 15B).

  The medal sensor 35S (input operation detecting means) detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the inside of the selector 35.

  Further, as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display devices), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. Specifically, the motor drive circuit 62, the display unit drive circuit 64 and the hopper drive circuit 65 are connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R respectively provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index which indicates that the reel has made one rotation, by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. The reel position detection circuit 63 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the detection result to the microcomputer 50.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. Also, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a fixed angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times the pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, whereby the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, the number of symbols of the reel) Manage only what).

  Here, a method of managing the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, every time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is “1 "Is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index.

  That is, in this embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbol rotation operations have been performed since the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected on the basis of the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether the medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside have reached a predetermined number of payouts. Do. The payout completion signal circuit 66 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the check result to the microcomputer 50.

[Sub control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter 92, an amplifier 93, various movable unit drive circuits (movable decorative portion drive units), and rotations. The lamp drive circuit 99 is included. In the present embodiment, the movable unit drive circuit is provided for each movable part, and the central movable unit drive circuit 96, the left movable unit drive circuit 97, and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 include the central movable unit 105 and the left movable unit. It is provided corresponding to 106 and the right movable unit 107, respectively.

  The sub CPU 81 performs output control of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  In the program storage area, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number for effect extraction, and determination of effect contents (effect data) An effect registration task for performing registration, an animation task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21, a speaker 20L , 20R, and programs such as a character control task for driving and controlling various movable roles (the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107). Be

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various presentation contents, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, BGM (Back-Ground Music) And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data relating to sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and a storage area for storing item movable data relating to operation patterns of various movable included.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents, presentation data and the like, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41 and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the sub control circuit 42 includes the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, the lamp group 21, the left effect switch 22L, the right effect switch 22R, the center movable unit 105, and the left movable unit Peripheral devices such as 106, the right movable unit 107, and the rotary light 124 are connected. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the rendering content, and the produced video is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

  The sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the D / A converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output the sound such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 performs lighting and extinguishing of the lamp group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 in accordance with the central movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 according to the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 in accordance with the right movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the rotary light drive circuit 99 drive the rotary light 124 in accordance with the rotary light drive data specified by the effect contents.

  In addition, each movable unit drive circuit may be separately configured by a character control board. Also in this case, at the time of driving of the movable unit, the movable unit drive circuit (character product control board) is provided based on the control data (character product movable data) inputted from the sub CPU 81. Drive control of the stepping motor). Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 may directly drive and control each movable unit.

  Furthermore, each of the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R detects that the player has pressed the switch, and transmits the detection result to the sub control circuit 42 described later.

<Configuration and operation of each movable unit>
In this embodiment, various effects are performed using the movable features of the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107. Here, the configuration and operation of each movable unit (movable combination) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 20.

  FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the front panel 10. As shown in FIG. 7, the front panel 10 has a decorative frame 101 in which a panel opening 101a for exposing a display screen area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is formed, and a transparent protective cover 102 for closing the panel opening 101a of the decorative frame 101. Have. The center movable unit 105 is provided at the center of the upper frame in the decoration frame 101, the left movable unit 106 is provided in the left frame in the decoration frame 101, and the right frame in the decoration frame 101. The right movable unit 107 is provided.

[Configuration of right movable unit (left movable unit)]
First, the configuration of the right movable unit 107 (right door combination) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the right movable unit 107, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the right movable unit 107. As shown in FIG. The configuration of the left movable unit 106 (left door combination) is symmetrical with that of the right movable unit 107, and the component parts thereof are the same as those of the right movable unit 107. Description of is omitted.

  The right movable unit 107 includes an upper cover 134, a door main body 135, and a door drive mechanism 136, as shown in FIGS.

  The upper cover 134 is disposed above the door main body 135 and fixed to the upper frame portion of the decorative frame 101. Further, the upper cover 134 is disposed to cover the upper portion of the door drive mechanism 136.

  The door main body 135 has a right door 189 and a pivot shaft 231 provided on the right side thereof and extending in the vertical direction. The right door 189 is attached to the door drive mechanism 136 so as to be pivotable about the pivot shaft 231. At the time of a predetermined effect using the right movable unit 107, the surface of the left side of the right door 189 (the surface opposite to the side of the pivot shaft 231: hereinafter referred to as the exterior side surface portion 189b) faces the player. The right door 189 pivots about the pivot shaft 231 (see FIGS. 10 to 12 described later).

  The door drive mechanism 136 has a case 251 and a bearing fixing portion 252 fixed to the case 251. The door drive mechanism 136 is a mechanism that generates a driving force for rotating the right door 189 and transmits the driving force to the rotating shaft 231. Therefore, in the case 251 of the door drive mechanism 136, various drive components (not shown) such as a stepping motor and a gear for driving the pivot shaft 231 are included.

  Furthermore, although not shown, in the case 251 of the door drive mechanism 136, a right door combination product origin sensor (origin determination means) is provided. The right door combination product origin sensor is a sensor provided to determine (detect) whether or not the right door 189 is disposed at the initial position (origin position). When the right door 189 is disposed at the initial position (origin position) (when the right door 189 is stored), the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is turned on, and the right door 189 is When it is not disposed at the initial position (when the right door 189 is in operation), the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is turned off. In the present embodiment, the left door role product origin for determining (detecting) whether or not the left door 188 is disposed at the initial position (storage position) also in the door drive mechanism of the left movable unit 106 A sensor (origin determination means) is provided.

[Operation of right movable unit]
Next, the operation of the right movable unit 107 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 are front views of the right movable unit 107 and are diagrams showing an operation process when the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 is fully opened (opened 100%) from the initial position. In the effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, the operation of the left movable unit 106 is symmetrical with the operation of the right movable unit 107, so only the operation of the right movable unit 107 will be described here. The description of the operation of the movable unit 106 is omitted.

  First, at the start of a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, as shown in FIG. 10, the right movable unit 105 is placed at the initial position (origin position). In this state, the exterior front portion 189a on which the leaf pattern of the right door 189 is drawn faces the player.

  Next, when a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is started, the right door 189 is driven by the door drive mechanism 136, and the right door 189 pivots about the pivot shaft 231. . At this time, as shown in FIG. 11, the right door 189 pivots about the pivot shaft 231 so that the exterior side surface portion 189b of the right door 189 faces the player (in the direction of arrow R1 in FIG. 11). Do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12, when the right door 189 is rotationally moved to a position where the exterior side surface portion 189b of the right door 189 faces the player, the movement of the right door 189 is stopped (the right door 189 is fully opened State). In the predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, the size of the liquid crystal screen exposed between the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is increased when the door is open.

  Next, at the end of a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, although not shown, the right door 189 returns from the fully open state shown in FIG. 12 to the initial state shown in FIG. It is rotationally driven. At this time, the door drive mechanism 136 rotationally drives the right door 189 in the direction opposite to the rotational drive direction when the right door 189 is opened.

[Configuration of door role material movable data]
Next, referring to FIG. 13, a configuration of accessory movable data (hereinafter referred to as door accessory movable data) used when driving left movable unit 106 and right movable unit 107 by a stepping motor in the door drive mechanism. Will be explained. FIG. 13 shows a door role thing movable data table. In addition, the door combination product movable data table corresponds the correspondence between the operation types of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 and the application pattern data (door combination product movable data) of the excitation pulse to the corresponding stepping motor. It is a specified table.

  As the operation types of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 in the door combination product movable data table of FIG. 13, “start test”, “open”, “close”, “back”, “10 open”, “10 closed”. "12 open", "20 closed", "30 open", "30 closed", "40 open" and "40 closed" to define 12 types of operation. Further, the numerical values described in the pulse width column in the door part product movable data table in FIG. 13 are values of the on state period of the excitation pulse applied to the stepping motor, and one period of excitation pulse including on and off ) Is twice the value described in the pulse width column. For example, when the numerical value described in the pulse width column is 3 msec, one period (period) of the excitation pulse including on and off is 6 msec.

  Further, “H” described in the direction column in the door combination product movable data table of FIG. 13 means maintaining the open / close state of each door of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107. "-" Described in the direction column in the door combination movable data table means a direction to open the right door 189 (R1 direction in the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 12) or a direction to close the left door 188, "+ “Means closing the right door 189 (in the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 in the direction opposite to the R1 direction) or opening the left door 188. Furthermore, the numerical value described in the several columns in the door combination product movable data table of FIG. 13 is the count number of the excitation pulse.

  Note that the door combination movable data specified in the "start test" in the door combination movable table of FIG. 13 is used in the start test of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 performed at the start of the pachislot 1 . In the door combination product movement data defined as "open" in FIG. 13, the left door 188 of the left movable unit 106 and the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 are fully open (figure in FIG. 10) It is used when rotating to the position of 12) (when rotating each door by 90 degrees). Further, the door combination product movement data defined as “close” in FIG. 13 is used when the fully opened right door 189 and left door 188 are returned to the initial position.

  The door combination object movement data defined in the "play" in the door combination product movement data table of FIG. 13 periodically repeats the opening and closing operations of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107. Used in production (vibration production). The door combination product movement data defined in “10 open” in FIG. 13 is used when each door is opened by 10% (when it is rotationally moved in the direction to open each door by 10%). Further, the door combination product movable data defined as "10 closed" in FIG. 13 is used when closing each door by 10% (when rotating each door in a direction to close by 10%).

  Here, the rotational movement of each door, for example, by 10%, is converted, assuming that each door is rotationally moved between the initial position and the fully open position as 100%. In addition, in the effect operation of each rotational movement of “play”, “10 open” to “40 open” and “10 close” to “40 close”, each door of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 has an initial position Or not only when it exists in a full open position, it is performed also when existing in a predetermined position between an initial position and a full open position.

  Here, as an example, the correspondence between the door combination product movement data defined in “Open” in the door combination product movement data table of FIG. 13 and each operation state shown in FIGS. explain.

  In the state in which the respective doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are stored at the initial position, the door role material movement data defined in “open” in the door portion material movement data table of FIG. When the feature effect is started, first, each door is held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 120 msec (a pulse cycle of 240 msec) is counted once. The state of the right movable unit 107 shown in FIG. 10 corresponds to the state of the hold operation.

  Next, rotational movement is performed to open the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse period 8 msec) is counted five times. Next, the door is further rotationally moved in the opening direction until the excitation pulse with a pulse width of 3 msec (pulse cycle 6 msec) is counted 50 times. The state in the middle of rotation of the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 shown in FIG. 11 corresponds to the state of the operation of these rotational movement.

  Subsequently, the rotational movement is further performed in the direction in which the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are opened until the excitation pulse with a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse period 8 msec) is counted five times. As a result, each door is in a fully open state (a state in which the door has rotated 90 degrees from the initial position). Thereafter, each door is held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 100 msec (a pulse cycle of 200 msec) is counted once. The state of the right movable unit 107 shown in FIG. 12 corresponds to the state of the hold operation.

[Special processing related to the presentation operation of the door role]
(1) Forced storage processing of the door combination In the effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 (door combination) of the present embodiment, it is defined as "close" in the door combination movable data table of FIG. As shown in the door combination product movement data, when the doors are returned from the fully open position to the initial position, except for the hold operation of each door, the excitation pulse applied to the stepping motor of each door Is moved in the closing direction of each door until it is counted 60 pulses (5 + 50 + 5 pulses).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the operation of closing each door (operation of "※ 1" column of "Close", "10 close", "20 close", "30 close" and "40 close" in FIG. 13) Even when the corresponding door combination product movement data is executed to the end, when each door does not return to the initial position (when the detection result of the combination object origin sensor of each door is in the OFF state), the excitation pulse is further generated. Each door is rotationally moved in the closing direction until is counted 60 pulses. That is, even if the door combination product movement data is executed to the end in the operation of closing each door, if each door does not return to the initial position, the combination to rotate and move 60 pulses in the direction to close each door Movable data (hereinafter referred to as door combination return to origin data) are additionally supplied to each door combination.

  At this time, if the type of closing operation is "10 closed", "20 closed", "30 closed" or "40 closed", the pulse width of the excitation pulse is 10 msec and the type of closing operation is "close". In this case, the pulse width of the excitation pulse is 4 msec. The pulse width of the excitation pulse when the type of closing operation is "close" is the same as the case where the type of closing operation is "10 closed", "20 closed", "30 closed" or "40 closed". It may be 10 msec.

  Each door can be forcibly returned to the initial position in the operation of closing each door by executing the additional processing of the above-mentioned door combination product origin return auxiliary data. In this case, even if the drive mechanisms such as solenoids and motors for driving the respective doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are deteriorated, the respective doors are returned to the initial position (origin position) by uniform processing. Because it is possible, it is possible to minimize the hindrance to the next production.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of excitation pulses in the door combination product origin return assist data is 60 pulses has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any number of pulses can be employed as long as each door can be forcibly returned to the initial position. Further, the pulse width of the excitation pulse in the door combination product origin return assist data is not limited to the above example, and can be appropriately changed. At this time, the number of pulses of the excitation pulse may be appropriately changed according to the pulse width of the employed excitation pulse.

(2) The display prohibition process of the guide menu at the time of door combination product operation In this embodiment, during the non-execution of the game (after the third stop), the SELECT button 19A or ENTE button 19B provided on the front door 2b When the button is pressed, the guide menu is displayed on the display unit 11a (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display device 11b. An example of the guide menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is shown in FIG. When the player selects a menu item in the guide menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 ("Uni-Memo", "Array / Payout", "Go to Dedicated Site" or "Return to Game"), the display screen is selected. Switch to the screen corresponding to the menu item.

  In the present embodiment, during the non-game after the third stop, when the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 (door combination) are in operation, the player presses the SELECT button 19A or the ENTE button 19B. Prohibits the display of the guide menu. In this case, the guide menu is displayed after the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 return to the initial positions.

  By executing the above-described processing for prohibiting display of the guide menu when the door combination is in operation, it is possible to prevent the guide menu from overlapping with the door combination as viewed from the player. As a result, the guide menu can be displayed under simple conditions without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Configuration of central movable unit]
Next, the configuration of the central movable unit 105 (central product) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the central movable unit 105. As shown in FIG.

  The central movable unit 105 includes a support member 301, a decorative movable member 302, a rack member 303, and a drive mechanism 304, as shown in FIG.

  The support member 301 is fixed to the upper frame portion of the decoration frame 101 using a fixing member such as a screw. Although not shown, the support member 301 is provided with a central combination origin sensor (origin determination means). Whether or not the movable decoration cover 323 described later in the decoration movable member 302 is disposed at the initial position (origin position) or not (this state of the decoration movable member 302 is shown in FIG. 15). It is a sensor provided to determine (detect) whether or not When the movable decorative cover 323 described later is disposed at the initial position (origin position), the detection result of the central object origin sensor is turned on, and the movable decorative cover 323 is not disposed at the initial position (center When the character is in operation), the detection result of the central character origin sensor is turned off.

  The decorative movable member 302 includes a pivot base 321, a slide base 322, a movable decorative cover 323, and an arch cover 324.

  The movable decorative cover 323 is a decorative member in which the head of the character "Billy" is formed three-dimensionally on the surface. The movable decorative cover 323 is mounted on the pivot base 321 and the slide base 322. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the movable decorative cover 323 is stored in the lower part of the arch cover 324 in the normal state (in the initial state).

  The arch cover 324 is a semi-cylindrical plate-like member, and is mounted on the pivot base 321. In addition, on the upper surface (peripheral surface) of the arch cover 324, a predetermined pattern (in the present embodiment, mainly characters "po") and a pattern are three-dimensionally formed.

  The rack member 303 has a decorative cover 364 on the surface of which mainly the back portion of the character "Billy" is three-dimensionally formed (see FIGS. 16 to 19 described later). The rack member 303 is attached to the support member 301. The rack member 303 is disposed behind the decorative movable member 302 in a state where the movable decorative cover 323 is disposed at the initial position (the state of FIG. 15), and is disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The drive mechanism 304 is a drive device for rotating and sliding the movable decorative cover 323. Therefore, the drive mechanism 304 includes various drive components (not shown) such as a stepping motor, a gear group, and a rotary shaft for rotating and sliding the movable decorative cover 323.

[Operation of central movable unit]
Next, an example of the rendering operation using the central movable unit 105 (central combination) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 15 to 18 are perspective views of the central movable unit 105 and are diagrams showing the respective operation processes at the time of a specific effect using the central movable unit 105. FIG. 19 is a front view of the front panel 10 when the specific effect using the center movable unit 105 is finished.

  In the specific effect using the central movable unit 105 described here, first, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are rotationally moved approximately 90 degrees from the initial position (the state of FIG. 15) (the state of FIG. 17) The movable decorative cover 323 is slid downward (the state of FIG. 18). Hereinafter, this particular effect is referred to as the “jump out” effect of the movable decorative cover 323.

  First, at the start of the “pop-out” effect using the central movable unit 105, as shown in FIG. 15, the movable decorative cover 323 is placed (stored) at the initial position (origin position). When the movable decorative cover 323 is disposed at the initial position, the tip of the movable decorative cover 323 faces forward (to the player), and the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 faces upward.

  Then, when the “pop out” effect is started, the rotational base 321 in the decoration movable member 302 is in the direction of the arrow R4 in the figure as shown in FIG. 16 by the rotational drive of the stepping motor in the drive mechanism 304. The rotary movement (so that the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 faces the player). As a result, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 installed on the rotating base 321 also rotationally move in the direction of the arrow R4 in the figure, as shown in FIG. Further, along with the rotational movement of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324, the decorative cover 364 provided on the rack member 303 is gradually exposed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17, when the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 rotate 90 degrees from the initial position, the rotational movement operation of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 ends. As a result, the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 is disposed at a position facing the player, and the decorative cover 364 provided on the rack member 303 is completely exposed at the top of the arch cover 324. At this point, the movable decorative cover 323 is housed behind the arch cover 324.

  Next, when the rotational movement of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 is finished, if the stepping motor in the drive mechanism 304 further executes rotational driving, the slide base 322 in the decorative movable member 302 slides downward. . As a result, the movable decorative cover 323 installed on the slide base 322 also slides downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 18, when the movable decorative cover 323 is in a state where it protrudes from the arch cover 324 downward, the sliding movement operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is finished, and the “jump out” effect using the central movable unit 105 is The operation also ends.

  When the sliding movement operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is finished, as shown in FIG. 19, the movable decorative cover 323 is positioned between the left door 188 of the left movable unit 106 and the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107, , And substantially at the center of the front of the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. As a result, at the end of the "pop out" effect using the central movable unit 105, the head of the character "Billy" drawn in three dimensions on the surface of the movable decorative cover 323 and the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 are three-dimensionally drawn. The predetermined symbol and pattern, and the back portion of the character “Billy” drawn three-dimensionally on the surface of the decorative cover 364 are visible to the player on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11.

[Configuration of central character movable data]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration of accessory movable data (hereinafter referred to as central accessory movable data) used when the central movable unit 105 is driven by the stepping motor in the drive mechanism 304 will be described. FIG. 20 shows a central product movable data table. The central combination movable data table is a table defining the correspondence between the type of operation of the central movable unit 105 and the application pattern data (central combination movable data) of the excitation pulse to the corresponding stepping motor. .

  In the central product movable data table of FIG. 20, five types of operation test of the central movable unit 105 are "start test", "popout", "storage", "vibration" and "small pop". Further, the numerical values described in the pulse width column in the central product movable data table in FIG. 20 are values of the on state period of the excitation pulse applied to the stepping motor, and one period (period) of the excitation pulse including on and off ) Is twice the value described in the pulse width column. For example, when the numerical value described in the pulse width column is 4 msec, one period (period) of the excitation pulse including on and off is 8 msec.

  Further, “H” described in the direction column in the central product movable data table of FIG. 20 means maintaining the state of the decorative movable member 302 (movable decorative cover 323). The "-" described in the direction column in the central character movable data table means the direction in which the movable decorative cover 323 pops out from the initial position (pop-out direction: R4 direction in Figs. 16 and 17), "+" This means the direction in which the movable decorative cover 323 is returned to the initial position (storage direction: the direction opposite to the R4 direction in FIGS. 16 and 17). Furthermore, the numerical value described in the number column in the central product moving data table of FIG. 20 is the count number of the excitation pulse.

  The central prize movable data defined in the "start test" in the central prize movable data table of FIG. 20 is used in the start test of the central movable unit 105 performed at the time of activating the pachislot 1 '. Also, the central combination product movement data defined in "jump out" in FIG. 20 is used when performing the operation of the "jump out" effect described in FIGS. Further, the central character movable data defined in "Storing" in FIG. 20 is in the state at the time when the effect of "projecting out" the movable decorative cover 323 (state where the movable decorative cover 323 protrudes from the arch cover 324: FIG. It is used when returning to the initial position from the position of state.

  In addition, central combination product movement data specified in “vibration” in FIG. 20 is an effect that periodically repeats the operation of moving the movable decorative cover 323 in the pop-out direction and the operation of moving the movable decoration cover 323 in the storage direction Used in In addition, the movement operation of "vibration" is performed not only when the movable decorative cover 323 exists at the initial position or the position at the end of the "out" effect but also when it exists at a predetermined position between the two positions. Be done. Furthermore, after moving the movable decorative cover 323 in the pop-out direction by the pop-out amount smaller than that of the "pop-out" effect, the central character movable data defined in "small pop-out" in FIG. 20 moves the movable decorative cover 323. It is used when performing an effect of returning the initial position.

  Here, as an example, the correspondence between the central combination product movement data defined in “pop out” in the central combination product movement data table of FIG. 20 and each operation state shown in FIGS. explain.

  With the central movable unit 105 (movable decorative cover 323 and arch cover 324) stored in the initial position, the central character movable data defined in "pop out" in the central character movable data table of FIG. When the accessory effect production used is started, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 100 msec (a pulse cycle of 200 msec) is counted once. The state of the central movable unit 105 (the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324) shown in FIG. 15 corresponds to the state of the hold operation.

  Next, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are rotationally moved in the pop-out direction (the direction of the arrow R4 in FIG. 16) until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 7 msec (pulse cycle 14 msec) is counted seven times. Next, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are further rotationally moved in the pop-out direction until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse cycle 8 msec) is counted 18 times. The states during the rotation of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 shown in FIG. 16 correspond to the states of the rotational movement of these.

  Next, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are further rotationally moved in the pop-out direction until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 6 msec (pulse cycle 12 msec) is counted seven times. As a result, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 rotate 90 degrees from the initial position, and the state at the end of the rotational movement of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 shown in FIG. 17 is generated.

  Next, an operation of sliding the movable decorative cover 323 downward is started. First, the stepping motor is further rotationally driven in the pop-out direction of the movable decorative cover 323 until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse cycle 8 msec) is counted once.

  Next, the stepping motor is further rotationally driven in the pop-out direction of the movable decorative cover 323 until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 3 msec (pulse cycle 6 msec) is counted 82 times. By the rotational drive of these stepping motors, the slide base 322 slides downward, and thereby the movable decorative cover 323 also slides downward. As a result, a state in which the movable decorative cover 323 pops out below the arch cover 324 is generated.

  Thereafter, the movable decorative cover 323 is held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 100 msec (a pulse cycle of 200 msec) is counted once. The state at the end of the slide movement of the movable decorative cover 323 shown in FIG. 18 corresponds to the state of the hold operation.

[Special processing related to directing operation of central character]
(1) Forced storage processing of central character In the effect using the central movable unit 105 (central character) of the present embodiment, the central character specified in “storage” in the central character movable data table of FIG. As shown in the object movable data, when the movable decorative cover 323 is returned to the initial position from the position at the end of the “pop out” effect (state in FIG. 18), except for the hold operation, stepping of the central movable unit 105 The movable decorative cover 323 is moved (sliding movement and rotational movement) in the storage direction until the excitation pulse applied to the motor is counted for 115 pulses (60 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 19 + 30 pulses).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the operation of housing the movable decorative cover 323 (the operation of the "※ 2" column of "stored" and "small jump out" in FIG. 20), the corresponding central combination movable data is executed to the end If the movable decorative cover 323 does not return to the initial position (if the detection result of the central object origin sensor is in the OFF state), the movable decorative cover 323 is further continued until 115 excitation pulses are counted. Move in the storage direction. That is, when the movable decoration cover 323 does not return to the initial position even if the central combination movable data is executed to the end in the operation of storing the movable decoration cover 323, 115 pulses of the movable decoration cover 323 in the storage direction are further applied. The additional movable object data to be moved (hereinafter referred to as "central combination return to origin data") is additionally supplied to the central movable unit 105 for a minute. At this time, the pulse width of the excitation pulse in the central combination product origin return auxiliary data is 12 msec.

  The movable decoration cover 323 can be forcibly returned to the initial position in the operation of storing the movable decoration cover 323 by executing the above-described addition processing of the central product origin return auxiliary data described above. In this case, even if the drive mechanism such as a solenoid or motor for driving the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 (central product) is deteriorated, the movable decorative cover 323 is uniformly processed to an initial position (origin Since it can be returned to the position), it is possible to minimize the hindrance to the next rendering.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the number of excitation pulses in the central combination product origin return auxiliary data is 115 pulses, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any number of pulses can be employed as long as the number of pulses is such that the movable decorative cover 323 can be forcibly returned to the initial position. Further, the pulse width of the excitation pulse in the central combination product origin return auxiliary data is not limited to the above example, and can be appropriately changed. At this time, the number of pulses of the excitation pulse may be appropriately changed according to the pulse width of the employed excitation pulse.

(2) Special processing when the next game is started during the central character's "pop out" effect The pachislot 1 of the present embodiment is after the third stop of the stop button (after detecting the OFF edge of the third stop operation) , A rendering function for causing the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 to appear on the front of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, a function for executing "popout" presentation (see FIGS. 15 to 18) of the central movable unit 105. Prepare. The “pop out” effect of such a central movable unit 105 (central product) is an effect that indicates that the game state is relatively high, and the expectation value for shifting to the game state in which the player is advantageous is high.

  However, in the “jump out” effect of the central movable unit 105 performed after the third stop of the stop button (after the detection of the OFF edge of the third stop operation), the movable decorative cover 323 pops out to the front of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 A start operation of the next game (an ON operation of the start lever 16) may be performed before (before the movable decorative cover 323 falls to the front of the liquid crystal screen).

  When such a situation occurs, in the present embodiment, the “projecting out” of the central movable unit 105 is performed at the start operation of the next game (at the time of receiving the start command) without canceling the “projecting out” effect of the central movable unit 105. Perform the production. Therefore, when the above situation occurs, the movable decorative cover 323 pops out to the front of the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display 11 after the start operation of the next game (the detection result of the central object origin sensor is off).

  Then, after the third game of the stop button of the next game (display command reception operation), the movable decoration cover 323 popped out in front of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display 11 after the start operation of the next game is returned to the initial position It takes place after a predetermined time has elapsed from time) or at the time of the start operation of the game (when a start command is received). At the former timing, a call sign of central character product storage instruction designation (linked) associated with a predetermined image frame in effect moving image data used in moving image display effect of liquid crystal display device 11 performed in the next game. The storage operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is started based on the detection of data. Further, at the latter timing, the storage operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is started triggered by the reception detection of the start command of the game one after another.

  Here, the detection operation of the call sign data (movement instruction information) of the central combination storage instruction is described more specifically. In the present embodiment, when “out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is performed after the OFF edge detection of the third stop operation, “out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is generated in consideration of the occurrence of the situation as described above. In a predetermined image frame from the time of detection of the OFF edge of the third stop operation in the sequence data (hereinafter referred to as effect sequence data) of the effect moving image displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the next game of the game played Call sign data (hereinafter, referred to as a call object storage character call sign) of the central character object storage instruction specification is associated (associated) and provided.

  Then, during playback of a moving image of the next game (moving image having nothing to do with the effect of the central movable unit 105 being “projected out”), an image frame associated with the character storage call sign for central character storage instruction is reproduced. Then, at that time, the subsidiary character storage call sign for which the central character article storage instruction is designated is detected by the sub CPU 81 and stored in a predetermined call sign storage area provided in the sub RAM 83. Therefore, the next game start operation before the movable decorative cover 323 pops out to the front of the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display device 11 in a situation where the "movable out" effect of the central movable unit 105 is performed after the OFF edge detection of the third stop operation When a predetermined time elapses after the detection of the OFF edge of the third game stop operation of the next game (when a display command is received), the call sign for storing a central product storage instruction is stored in the call sign storage area. When the game is started (when the start command is received) and there is no registered feature data, the storing operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the start operation of the next game is performed before the “popout” effect of the central movable unit 105 after the detection of the OFF edge of the third stop operation is performed, the third stop operation of the next game is performed. Although an example in which the storage operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is performed after a predetermined time elapses from the detection of the OFF edge or at the start operation of the game one after another will be described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, information for designating a timing for performing a storage operation may be included in a call sign for specifying a central product storage instruction, and the storage operation may be performed at a timing corresponding to the information.

  By performing the special process at the time of the "pop-out" effect of the central movable unit 105 (central product) as described above, an effect with a high expectation value can be reliably notified without inhibiting the operation of the player.

<Error detection processing of movable role>
The pachi slot 1 of the present embodiment has various functions for monitoring the operating state of each movable part. Here, among them, error detection processing of each movable combination (the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107) performed at the time of activation and at the time of start operation of unit game (at the time of start command reception) Do.

  In the error detection process of the movable combination at the time of activation and start operation of the unit game performed in the present embodiment, whether or not the detection result of the combination origin sensor of each movable combination is in the ON state (each movable combination Determines whether or not it has returned to the home position), and if it is not in the on state, it is determined that an error has occurred. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not each movable role is disposed at the origin position (initial position) by using the item origin sensor of each movable role, but the present invention is limited thereto Instead, any device can be used as long as it is a determination device that can determine whether or not each movable part is located at the origin position (initial position).

  Further, when the occurrence of an error of the movable combination is detected in the error detection process at the time of activation, the occurrence information of the error is registered in the error information history (see FIG. 317 described later). On the other hand, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game, when the occurrence of the error at the start operation continues a predetermined number of times in a predetermined movable combination (at the start operation continuously over the predetermined number of games) If an error occurs), the driving of the predetermined movable part is prohibited (immobilized). Then, at this time, information indicating that driving of the predetermined movable combination is prohibited (a combination error stop information) is registered in the error information history.

  In addition, in the error detection process at the time of start operation of unit game, when the driving of the movable combination is prohibited by the occurrence of an error about once or twice continuously, the variation for each product (game machine) or the aged deterioration of the movable combination etc. The possibility of false detection is high due to the influence of On the other hand, if the number of consecutive error detections for prohibiting the drive of the movable part is made too large, the possibility of the movable part failing before the drive prohibition of the movable part becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the balance between protection of the movable part and prevention of false detection, the occurrence of an error in the movable part is detected continuously during the start operation over five games. In this case, the driving of the movable part is prohibited (immobilized).

  However, the number of consecutive error detections for inhibiting the drive of the movable part is not limited to five, and can be appropriately changed in consideration of, for example, the durability of the movable part. Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of the movable part, the number of consecutive error detections for inhibiting the driving of the movable part is uniformly set to five times, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of consecutive error detections for inhibiting the driving of the object may be changed for each type of movable part.

  Further, the number of consecutive occurrences of errors of the movable combination during the start operation of the unit game is counted by an error counter for each movable combination provided in the sub RAM 83. Specifically, the number of consecutive occurrences of errors of the central movable unit 105 (central character) at the start of the unit game operation is counted by the central character error counter, and the left movable unit 106 (left door character) The number of consecutive occurrences of errors is counted by the left door symbol product error counter, and the number of consecutive occurrences of errors of the right movable unit 107 (right door symbol) is counted by the right door symbol product error counter (described later) See FIG. 320 and FIG. 321 for the item operation start monitoring process).

  By performing the above-described error detection process of the movable part, the movable part can be protected more easily. Further, in the present embodiment, since the error occurrence information and the feature error stop information at the time of activation are registered in the error information history (see FIG. 317 described later), the hall menu (menu displayed by setting confirmation) or the simple menu In the error information history screen in (the menu displayed by turning the door key counterclockwise), it is possible to easily confirm the operation state (error generation state) of the movable combination. In this case, maintenance of the pachi slot 1 can be performed at an early stage based on the error information history, and a fatal failure of the movable part can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game, the error information (parts error stop information) is generated only when the occurrence of an error of the movable combination is detected five consecutive times during the start operation. An example will be described in which is registered in the error information history, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game as well as the product error stop information, the error occurrence information may be registered in the error information history as in the error detection process at the start.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Symbol arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data for specifying the position of each symbol in the rotational direction of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, and the type of symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (FIG. 21) Define the correspondence with the symbol code table of

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, the order corresponding to the value of the symbol counter in the order of proceeding in the direction of rotation of the reel (direction from symbol position "20" to symbol position "0" in FIG. 21) with symbol position "0" as a reference 0 "to" 20 "are assigned to each symbol as a symbol position.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter values ("0" to "20") and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window Can identify the type of For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is displayed in the upper, middle and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “REP1”, the symbol “BEL1” at the symbol position “7” and the symbol “WML1” at the symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Symbol combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (1 to 8) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of benefit, the display combination (storage area) and the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the symbol combination table not only symbol combinations relating to benefits (bonus, medal payout, replay), but also symbols serving as triggers when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state The combination (refer to the symbol combination relating to the code name “KB01” (transition to G_RT1) in FIG. 22) is also described as a display combination.

  In this embodiment, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined to be a prize. Then, when it is determined to be a winning, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of medals and the operation of replay (replay). When the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it becomes a so-called "off". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of “off” is defined by not defining the combination of symbols corresponding to “off” in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and an item of "displacement" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "displacement".

  The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  Further, data of “storage area” in the display combination column is data for specifying a display combination storage area (see FIG. 58 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 62 display combination storage areas are provided. And in this embodiment, the bit pattern (data pattern of 1 byte) is the same, and the display combination with different contents is managed as another display combination according to the difference of "storage area".

  The numerical values described in the payout amount column in the symbol combination table indicate the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which one or more numerical values are given as data of "the number of payouts", the medals of the same number as the numerical values are paid out.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination (G_15 sheets of bell _3) according to any of the code names “BL01” to “BL03” is determined as the display combination with respect to the inserted number of three medals. And 15 medals are paid out (see FIGS. 27 and 28). Further, for example, when the display combination (G_14 sheet bell) relating to the code name “BM01” is determined as the display combination with respect to the inserted number of three medals, payout of 14 medals is performed ( See FIG. 28).

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to replay (for example, the symbol combination of the display combination (G_control lip _1) related to the code name “Z001” in FIG. 22, etc.) is determined as the display combination, the replay Is activated. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to “MB (middle bonus)” (symbol combination of display combination (G_MB) related to code name “MB01” in FIG. 22) is determined as the display combination, MB (CB) operates.

[Bonus activated table]
Next, the bonus operation table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation table is stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 53, the bonus end number counter, the possible game number counter, and the possible game number counter when the bonus operation is performed. Define the data to be

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in operation. In the present embodiment, a middle bonus (hereinafter referred to as “MB”) and a challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) are provided as types of bonus games. "CB" is a so-called second-class special role. "MB" is called an item continuous operation device according to a second type special item, and operates "CB" continuously. Therefore, when "MB" is activated, "CB" is also activated.

  The bonus end number counter is a counter (data) for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a specified number that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the display combination related to the code name “MB01” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 22 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, “MB” operates, and then the prescribed number "MB" is ended when medals exceeding "14" are paid out.

  In the operation of “MB” described above, first, at the start of the bonus, the bonus end number counter stores the numerical value (specified number) defined in the bonus operation time table. Next, every time the medals are paid out during the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to a value less than "0", the active bonus ends.

  The possible game number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining playable games at the time of "CB" operation, that is, the number of possible games. The possible winning number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games capable of displaying the combination of symbols relating to winning at the time of the “MB (CB)” operation, the so-called possible number of winnings However, it is not defined in this embodiment.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

  In this embodiment, as the RT gaming state, five types of states of RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state are provided, in which the type of internal winning combination of replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. And in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, it becomes a transition condition between RT gaming states that a symbol combination relating to a predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  Specifically, regardless of the transfer source RT gaming state, the code names “BP 01” (G_ push order failure 1 sheet winning combination 1), “BP 02” (G_ push order failure one roll combination 2) and “R 001” (G_RT 0 When the symbol combination of the display combination according to any of the transition Lips is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. Also, the symbol combination of the display combination according to either the code name “KB01” (G_RT1 transition point) or “R101” (G_RT1 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the transition source RT gaming state In this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

  Also, regardless of the RT gaming state of the transition source, when the symbol combination of the display combination according to the code name "R201" (G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Migrate to Also, regardless of the RT gaming state of the transition source, the symbol combination of the display combination according to any one of the code names "R301" (G_RT3 transition Lip_1) to "R311" (G_RT3 transition Lip_11) is stopped and displayed on the effective line If it is, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. Furthermore, the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state when the symbol combination of the display combination according to the code name "R401" (G_RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the RT gaming state of the transfer source. Migrate to

  The features of each RT gaming state and the transition flow between the RT gaming states will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between each gaming state and the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of times of lottery set in each gaming state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “3”), the internal lottery table for normal gaming state is used, and “50” is set as the number of times of lottery. Further, in the CB gaming state (the insertion number of medals is "3"), the internal lottery table for CB is used, and "35" is set as the number of times of lottery.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning number and the lottery value when each winning number is determined in each of the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) and the CB gaming state.

  Further, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting an expected value of internal winnings such as a preset bonus or a small winning combination. This setting is changed, for example, using a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, random number values (external random number values) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (for example, 0 to 65535) are lottery values defined corresponding to respective winning numbers. Subtract sequentially with. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called "worried" has occurred). Then, if the result of subtraction becomes negative (a "digit" occurs) at a predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number has been won.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment, the probability that assigned data (data pointer described later) is determined is higher as the winning number is larger and the numerical value specified as the lottery value is larger. In addition, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value defined for each winning number / number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

(1) Internal lottery table (RT0) for general gaming state
FIG. 33 shows a structure of an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the normal gaming state is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table (RT0) for the normal gaming state defines the relationship between winning numbers "1" to "50" and their lottery values.

  For example, in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the probability of winning the winning number "2" (abbreviated "F_RT0 lip") is "8978/65536" with reference to the setting 6 of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state. ". When the winning number "2" is won, "2" is obtained as a data pointer to be described later.

  In the internal gaming table for general gaming state (RT0), as shown in FIG. 33, predetermined lottery values (5467) are defined for each of the winning numbers "38" to "40". When one of winning numbers "38" to "40" is won, an internal winning combination relating to any of "F_ middle bell 1" to "F_ right middle left bell 1" is determined as an internal winning combination. .

  These internal winning combinations include a transition combination (code name “KB01” (G_RT1 transition point)) for shifting the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, as shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later. . Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, and any of the winning numbers "38" to "40" is determined by internal lottery, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state Sometimes.

(2) Internal lottery table for RT1 FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for RT1. The internal lottery table for RT1 is a table to be referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for RT1 defines the relationship between winning numbers "1" to "35" and their lottery values.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined in the column of winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for general gaming state (RT0) shown in FIG. It is changed to the lottery value specified in the column of winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery value of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for the ordinary gaming state (RT0).

  In the internal lottery table for RT1, as shown in FIG. 34, predetermined lottery values are defined for winning numbers "3" to "9". When one of winning numbers “3” to “9” is won, an internal winning combination relating to any of “F_RT2 transfer-213” to “F_3 continuous use don lip” is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In these internal winning combinations, as shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, various transition roles to shift the RT gaming state (code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition Lip), code name "R201" ( G_RT2 transition list), code names “R301” to “R311” (G_RT3 transition list)) are included. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, and one of the winning numbers "3" to "9" is determined by internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state according to the winning type. It may shift to any of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, and RT3 gaming state.

(3) Internal lottery table for RT2 FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT2. The internal lottery table for RT2 is a table to be referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for RT2 defines the relationship between winning numbers “1” to “35” and their lottery values.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined in the winning number "1" to "35" column of the internal gaming table for general gaming state (RT0) shown in FIG. It is changed to the lottery value specified in the column of winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery value of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for the ordinary gaming state (RT0).

  In the internal lottery table for RT2, as shown in FIG. 35, predetermined lottery values are defined for winning numbers “10” to “16”. When one of winning numbers “10” to “16” is won, an internal winning combination relating to any of “F_Don-D0 transition 2nd” to “F_RB fake” is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In these internal winning combinations, as shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, various transition roles of the RT gaming state (code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition ripple), code name "R101" (G_RT1 transition R), code names “R301” to “R311” (G_RT3 transition ripple), and code names “R401” (G_RT4 transition ripple)). Therefore, if the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, and one of the winning numbers "10" to "16" is determined by internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state according to the winning type. It may shift to any of RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT3 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state.

(4) Internal lottery table for RT3 FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for RT3. The internal lottery table for RT3 is a table to be referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for RT3 defines the relationship between winning numbers "1" to "35" and their lottery values.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined in the column of winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for general gaming state (RT0) shown in FIG. It is changed to the lottery value specified in the column of winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery value of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for the ordinary gaming state (RT0).

  In the internal lottery table for RT3, as shown in FIG. 36, predetermined lottery values are defined for winning numbers "1", "17" to "23", "30" and "31", respectively. When any of winning numbers “1”, “17” to “23”, “30” and “31” is won, the abbreviation “F_normal lip”, “F_don lower fake” to “F_” as an internal winning combination. The internal winning combination according to any of “Don middle row match”, “F_RT4 transition 2nd” and “F_RT4 transition 3rd” is determined.

  In these internal winning combinations, as shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, various transition roles of the RT gaming state (code name "R101" (G_RT1 transition ripple), code name "R401" (G_RT4 transition Lip) is included. Therefore, if the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, and one of the winning numbers "1", "17" to "23", "30" and "31" is determined by internal lottery, the winning is achieved. Depending on the type, the RT gaming state may shift from the RT3 gaming state to either the RT1 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

(5) Internal lottery table for RT4 FIG. 37 is a view showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT4. The internal lottery table for RT4 is a table to be referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for RT4 defines the relationship between winning numbers "1" to "35" and their lottery values.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined in the column of winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for general gaming state (RT0) shown in FIG. It is changed to the lottery value specified in the column of winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery value of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” of the internal gaming table for the ordinary gaming state (RT0).

  In the internal lottery table for RT4, as shown in FIG. 37, predetermined winnings are made for winning numbers “1”, “8”, “9”, “24” to “29” and “32” to “35”, respectively. The value is specified. When one of the winning numbers "8", "9", "24" to "29" and "32" to "35" is won, the abbreviation "F_normal lip" or "F_3 continuous don lip" as an internal winning combination. , The internal winning combination pertaining to any of “F_3 continuous use Dongrip”, “F_reach eye lip 1” to “F_reach eye lip 6” and “F_RT4-2 transition 213” to “F_RT4-2 transition 321” It is determined.

  In these internal winning combinations, as shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, various transition roles of the RT gaming state (code name "R101" (G_RT1 transition ripple), code name "R201" (G_RT2 transition RIP) and code names “R301” to “R311” (G_RT3 transition ripple)). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, and one of the winning numbers "8", "9", "24" to "29" and "32" to "35" is determined by internal lottery. Depending on the winning category, the RT gaming state may shift from the RT4 gaming state to either the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state.

  As described above, in the internal lottery table for RT1 to the internal lottery table for RT4, the lottery values for winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” are the internal lottery tables for general gaming state shown in FIG. The same lottery value as the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” of RT0) is used. That is, also in the internal lottery table for RT1 to the internal lottery table for RT4, predetermined lottery values are defined respectively for winning numbers "38" to "40". When one of winning numbers "38" to "40" is won, an internal winning combination relating to any of "F_ middle bell 1" to "F_ right middle left bell 1" is determined as an internal winning combination. .

  These internal winning combinations include a transition combination (code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one push failure)) for shifting the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Therefore, if the RT gaming state is any of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and one of the winning numbers "38" to "40" is determined by internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state May shift to

(6) Internal lottery table for CB FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for CB. The internal lottery table for CB is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is the CB gaming state (MB gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the CB gaming state, the relationship between winning numbers "1" to "35" and their lottery values is defined.

  For example, in the CB gaming state (MB gaming state), the probability of winning a winning number "2" (abbreviated "F_RT0 lip") with reference to the CB internal lottery table is "8978/65536". Further, in the present embodiment, in the CB (MB) gaming state, in addition to the roles (Replay role) specified on the CB internal lottery table, all small roles (CB roles) are also won (FIG. 40 described later). Internal winning combination decision table (see 2)).

  FIG. 38 shows an internal lottery table to be referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 state (initial state etc.) and the CB (MB) is in the winning state (the MB is operated). . However, although not shown here, the internal lottery table for CB to be referenced when the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT0 state and the CB (MB) is in a winning state (a state where the MB is activated). Also prepare separately.

  Further, as is clear from the various internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, in the present embodiment, “off” occurs in the internal lottery process. Although not shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, a winning number "0" is assigned to "off".

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the internal winning combination determination table will be described. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the data pointer is determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  The data pointer is data acquired based on the winning number acquired as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is for specifying an internal winning combination defined by the internal winning combination determination table. It is data.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the non-bonus state (non-MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0), internal lottery table for RT1 to RT4 The winning number defined in the internal lottery table) is the value of the data pointer. Therefore, it corresponds to the winning numbers "1" to "35" defined in the internal lottery table in the normal gaming state (internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0), internal lottery table for RT1 to internal lottery table for RT4). The values of the data pointers are “1” to “35”, respectively. In addition, the value of the data pointer corresponding to "out" is also made the same value as the winning number "0".

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the bonus state (MB gaming state), a value obtained by adding “51” to the value of the winning number defined in the CB internal lottery table is the value of the data pointer. Therefore, the values of the data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers "1" to "35" defined in the CB internal lottery table are "52" to "86", respectively. Also, the value of the data pointer corresponding to "out" is also added "51" to the winning number "0" to make "51".

  Although not shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, in the "internal winning combination" column in the internal winning combination determination table, not only the code name and abbreviation indicating the internal winning combination but also display along the effective line is permitted. , And data for identifying combinations of symbols on left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R. Specifically, the identification data of "internal winning combination" is represented by a combination of 1-byte data and a storage area, similarly to "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 22 to 29, A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

  Further, the “o” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates an internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer. In addition, when the data pointer is "0", the content of "Internal winning combination" is "off", but this is a combination of all the symbols specified by the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. Indicates that the display of is not permitted.

  In the internal winning combination determination table (part 1) shown in FIG. 39, the correspondence between data pointers “1” to “50” and the internal winning combination is defined. That is, in the non-bonus state (non-MB gaming state), when determining the internal winning combination based on the acquired data pointer, the internal winning combination determination table (part 1) shown in FIG. 39 is referred to.

  In this embodiment, for example, when the data pointer "2" (corresponding to the winning number "2" in the internal lottery table of FIG. 33) is acquired in the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG. Internal winning combination (Replay role) pertaining to code names “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), “RT01” (G_upper row lip), “RB01” (G_lower row lip) and “RC01” (G_middle row) as winning combinations. Win a double.

  In the internal winning combination determination table (part 2) shown in FIG. 40, the correspondence between the data pointers “51” to “86” and the internal winning combination is defined. That is, in the bonus state (MB gaming state), when the internal winning combination is determined based on the acquired data pointer, the internal winning combination determination table (part 2) shown in FIG. 40 is referred to.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the data pointer “53” (corresponding to the winning number “2” in the CB internal lottery table in FIG. 38) is acquired in the bonus state (MB gaming state), As shown in FIG. 40, code names “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), “RT01” (G_upper lip), “RB01” (G_lower lip) and “RC01” (G_middle lip) as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combination concerned (Replay combination), and all the small winning combination (internal winning combination related to code name "BP01" (G_ push order failure 1 sheet 1) ~ "KC 07" (G_ square cherry 7)) is double winning. .

[Roller stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the rotation stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The spinning stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 259 described later).

  The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a rotation stop number different for each data pointer. Specifically, spinning stop numbers “0” to “86” are associated with data pointers “0” to “86”, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the data pointer is "3", the reel stop number "3" is selected.

  In addition, although the number selection table for rotation stop numbers of this embodiment prescribes different rotation stop numbers for each data pointer, the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation stop number may be defined for different data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel Stop Initial Setting Table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the rotation stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority order table selection process described later and the process of determining the number of sliding symbols of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push The correspondence between the table change initial data and the irregular push table selection data is defined.

  The drawing priority order table selection table number and the drawing priority order table number are data used for the drawing priority order table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, a pull-in priority table defined in a pull-in priority table (see FIG. 48 described later) will be described. Data on the priority of the display combination corresponding to the number can be acquired.

  Also, in the reel stop initial setting table, if the draw-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is not defined, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 47 described later) is referred to and the pull-in is performed. A priority order table number corresponding to the priority order table selection table number is determined.

  The forward press table selection data, the forward press table change data, and the forward press table change initial data specify a stop table (see FIGS. 43 to 45 described later) to be referred to when the forward press is performed. It is data for. In the present specification, “forward press” is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L, specifically, Corresponding to the pressing order of "left middle right" and "left and right middle".

  The irregular pressing table selection data is data for specifying a stop table (see FIG. 46 described later) to be referred to when irregular pressing is performed. In the present specification, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and “middle left and right”, “middle right left”, “middle right left” Corresponding to the pressing order of "right middle left" and "right left middle".

  In this embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state (non-bonus gaming state), after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped at a predetermined position within 190 msec. In this reel stop operation, in the reel on which the stop operation has been performed, any one of the sliding symbol numbers “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected. The symbol position corresponding to the value obtained by the addition is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is to be stopped (this will be referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the stop of the rotation of the reel is started, which is referred to as "stop start position".

  That is, the number of sliding symbols is the amount of rotation of the predetermined reel from when the stop operation on the predetermined reel is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols passing through the middle region of the predetermined reel of the display window in the period from when the stop operation to the predetermined reel is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. . This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation by the stop switch 17S is detected.

  Referring to the stop table described later, the number of sliding symbols is obtained according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding symbols is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a temporary one, and the planned stop position of the reel is not determined immediately by the acquired number of sliding symbols.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of sliding symbols is more appropriate than the number of sliding symbols (hereinafter referred to as “sliding number determination data”) acquired based on a stop table described later (see FIG. 43 described later) The number of sliding symbols is changed with reference to a pull-in priority order table (see FIG. 48 described later) described later. The sliding piece number determination data is used to determine the search order when comparing the priorities for each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four points ahead or one point ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding symbols. Used.

  In the present embodiment, different stop tables are used according to the pressing order of the stop button of the forward press and the irregular press. Specifically, in the case of the forward press, the stop table for first press first stop described later (see FIG. 43 described later) and the second and third stop table based on forward push described later (FIG. 45 described later). See) and On the other hand, in the case of the irregular push, the irregular push stop table (see FIG. 46 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop at first press]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the stop table for the first push first stop will be described. The forward press first stop stop table shown in FIG. 43 is a stop table that is referred to when the forward press table selection data is “01”. The stop table for the first press at the first stop defines the correspondence between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the sliding symbol number determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the sliding piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to a forward push control change table (see FIG. 44 described later) described later.

[Order change control control table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the forward pressing control change table will be described. The forward push control change table shown in FIG. 44 is a change table that is referred to when the forward push table change data is “00”. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the planned stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the forward push second and third stop stop table numbers.

  For example, if the change status acquired based on the first push stop table for first push (see FIG. 43) is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes “12”. In the forward push control change table, when the change status and the forward push second and third stop stop table numbers are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stops when pressing forward and stop table with irregular pressing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of the forward press and the stop table for the irregular press will be described. The first and second stop tables and the abnormal stop table define one byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  In addition, the stop table for the second and third stops for forward pressing shown in FIG. 45 is referred to when the stop table number for the second and third stops for forward pressing is “08”. Further, the irregular push time stop table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to when the irregular push time table selection data is “07”.

  Is stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop stop tables and abnormal stop table at the time of forward pressing appropriate as the position where the symbol position to which it is associated is to stop the rotation of the reel? It has the information of no. Then, this stop data is information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is suitable as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, and a row of bits corresponding to the row of “A line” in each stop table and a row of “B line” Allocate to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by assigning information as to which of the two types of information to be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the abnormal stop table for forward pressing define a plurality of ways of determining the position at which to stop the rotation of the reel. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, it is possible to make the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped different, based on the stop position at the first stop and the like. By adopting such a configuration, compression of information can be achieved.

  The determination of the number of sliding symbols determination data is performed as follows. First, according to the type of stop button in which the stop operation is detected, it is designated which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to the bit 1) constituting the stop data. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, with reference to the designated bit string, it is sequentially searched whether "1" is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is determined as the number of sliding symbols determination data.

  Note that whether to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column refers to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is decided by whether it is done or not. Then, when it is determined that the line change is to be performed, thereafter, the column of “B line” is designated, and the above search is performed.

[Import priority table selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the drawing priority order table selection table will be described. The drawing priority order table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the drawing priority order table selection table number and the pressing order of the stop button, and the drawing priority order table number in each combination. The drawing priority order table number is data for acquiring information on the priority of the display combination defined in the drawing priority order table (see FIG. 48 described later).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the column of "left hand cylinder first stop" in the pull-in priority order table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority order table selection table number is "01", first, the pull-in priority order table number "01" is acquired. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 47, the drawing priority order table number “01” is maintained regardless of the types of reels for the second and third stops.

  Further, in the pull-in priority order table selection table, when the pull-up priority order table number is not registered in the column of the target position in the table, the number shown in the right hand column of the right reel first stop column is Acquired as a pull-in priority table number. For example, when the middle reel 3C is stopped for the first time and the drawing priority order table selection table number is "00", the drawing priority order table number is not registered in the column of the target position corresponding to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the column to the right of the right reel first stop column corresponding to the drawing priority order table selection table number “00” is referred to, and “02” is acquired as the drawing priority order table number.

[Import priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority order table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority order table defines the correspondence between pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-up priority table numbers “00” to “09”.

  In addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table, the drawing priority order table is used to search whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the stop display (pulled in) is preferentially given among the types of combinations of symbols related to winning. Each pull-in data is represented by 1-byte data, similarly to the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 22 to 29, and a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. A combination of is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding symbols is acquired based on the above-described forward-pushing first-stop table (see FIG. 43). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols for permitting the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired by the stop table.

  In this embodiment, the stop display (retraction) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination with higher priority in the retraction priority table is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination with lower priority. It takes precedence over stop indication.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, not only the priority of the internal winning combination differs according to the pull-in priority table number but also the number of divisions of the priority. For example, if the drawing priority order table number is "00", the number of divisions of priority is set to 3, and if the drawing priority order table number is "09", the number of divisions of priority is set to 2. .

  Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “00” will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. The code names "Z001" to "Z036", "R301" to "R311", "R401", "R201", "R201", "R101" are assigned to the priority "1" when the attraction priority table number is "00". , “R001”, “RT01”, “RB01”, and “RC01” are defined.

  The code names “KB01”, “BP01”, “BP02”, “BF01” to “BF03”, “BL01” to “BL03” are assigned to the priority order “2” when the pull-in priority order table number is “00”. , “BM01”, “BC01”, “SG01”, “WT01”, “WB01”, “WU01”, “WD01”, “WC01”, “CC01”, “CC01” and “KC01” to “KC07” It is prescribed. And, in the priority order "3" when the drawing priority order table number is "00", the drawing-in data corresponding to the code name "MB01" is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, referring to FIGS. 49 and 50, the search order table will be described. The search order table is an order (hereinafter referred to as “search order”) to be preferentially applied from a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding symbols (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding symbols is 4) Define). The search order table shown in FIG. 49 is a table to be referred to when the stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding symbols being four. The search order table shown in FIG. 50 is a table to be referred to when the stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding symbols as one (when determining the number of sliding symbols for at least one reel at the time of MB operation).

  The search order table defines sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the above-described stop table and its search order. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there is a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply a higher order search order. Further, in the present embodiment, the stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding symbols of four for reels other than the reels in which the maximum number of sliding symbols is one during MB (CB) operation.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the priority attraction control process of FIG. 269 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lowest search order “5” (or “2”) in the search order table, The number of sliding symbols is preferentially applied from the numerical value corresponding to the search order “1”.

[Symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described. The symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combinations that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the activated line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29).

  For example, when the symbol "DON" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, display is possible in the storage areas 1 to 62 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (DON) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is ANDed with data stored in a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62 described later) and stored.

[Game lock lottery table]
In the Pachi-Slot 1 of this embodiment, in the RT0 to RT4 gaming state, when a specific internal winning combination is won, lottery of the game lock is performed. Then, when winning the lottery, a predetermined reel effect (game lock) is performed during a period of acceleration processing of the reels. In addition, while the game lock is occurring, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed even if the closing operation or the closing operation is performed. The various game lock lottery tables described here are mainly used when determining various patterns of game locks to be performed during a period of acceleration processing of reels.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56, the game lock lottery table will be described. In the present embodiment, a game lock lottery table is provided for each RT gaming state. The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the game lock type (lock number) to be won according to the winning number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery in a predetermined RT gaming state (RT0 to RT4 gaming state) .

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game lock lottery table (part 1) referred to in the RT0 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (No. 1) has a winning number "43" (abbreviated "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviated "F_strong ice") and "46" (abbreviated "F_strong chase") to "49". In each of “abbreviated“ F_chance aim ””, the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “47” (abbreviated “F_middle tier”) and “48” (abbreviated “ In the case of any one of F_confirmation), any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (turn drum effect pattern 2) is selected. Also, in the RT0 gaming state, when the winning number is one of “46” (abbreviated “F_strong Choi”) and “49” (abbreviated “F_chance prominence”), lock number 0 (normal pattern) and One game lock of the lock number 1 (turning drum effect pattern 1) is selected.

  The lock number 0 (normal pattern) corresponds to a pattern in which the reel is not locked (normal reel acceleration processing). The lock number 1 (turning drum effect pattern 1) and the lock number 2 (turning drum effect pattern 2) correspond to a lock effect pattern called “short lock”.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of a gaming lock lottery table (part 2) referred to in the RT1 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (part 2) has a winning number “9” (abbreviated “F_3 continuous use don lip”), “24” (abbreviated “F_reach eye lip 1”), “25” (abbreviated “F_reach eye”) "Rip 2"), "43" (abbreviated "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviated "F_strong ice") and "46" (abbreviated "F_strong chase") to "49" (abbreviated "F_ chance") In each of the roles "), lottery values of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) are defined.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “47” (abbreviated “F_middle tier”) and “48” (abbreviated “ In the case of any of F_confirmation che)), as in the RT0 gaming state, any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (turning drum effect pattern 2) is selected. . Also, in the RT1 gaming state, the winning number is “24” (abbreviated “F_reach eye lip 1”), “25” (abbreviated “F_reach eye lip 2”), “46” (abbreviated “F_strong chute”) And one of "49" (abbreviated "F_chance aim"), one of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (turning drum effect pattern 1) is selected. . Furthermore, in the RT1 gaming state, when the winning number is "9" (abbreviated "F_3 continuous use don lip"), one of the lock number 0 (normal pattern) and the lock number 3 (turning drum effect pattern 3) is selected Be done.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the configuration of the gaming lock lottery table (3) referred to in the RT2 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (3) is a winning number "43" (abbreviated "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviated "F_strong ice") and "46" (abbreviated "F_strong chase") to "49". In each of “abbreviated“ F_chance aim ””, the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT2 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “47” (abbreviated “F_middle tier”) and “48” (abbreviated “ In the case of any of F_confirmation che)), as in the RT0 gaming state, any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (turning drum effect pattern 2) is selected. . In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, when the winning number is either “46” (abbreviated “F_strong Choi”) or “49” (abbreviated “F_chance prominence”), the same as in the RT0 gaming state , One game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotation drum effect pattern 1) is selected.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of the gaming lock lottery table (part 4) referred to in the RT3 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (No. 4) has a winning number "43" (abbreviated "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviated "F_strong ice") and "46" (abbreviated "F_strong Choi") to "49". In each of “abbreviated“ F_chance aim ””, the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT3 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “47” (abbreviated “F_middle rank”) and “48” (abbreviated “ In the case of any of F_confirmation che)), as in the RT0 gaming state, any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (turning drum effect pattern 2) is selected. . In addition, in the RT3 gaming state, when the winning number is either “46” (abbreviated “F_strong Choi”) or “49” (abbreviated “F_chance prominence”), the same as in the RT0 gaming state , One game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotation drum effect pattern 1) is selected.

  FIG. 56 is a view showing the configuration of the gaming lock lottery table (part 5) referred to in the RT4 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (No. 5) has a winning number “1” (abbreviated “F_normal ripple”), “24” (abbreviated “F_reach eyes lip 1”), “25” (abbreviated “F_reach eyes) 2), "43" (abbreviated "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviated "F_strong ice") and "46" (abbreviated "F_strong chase") to "49" (abbreviated "F_ chance") In each of the “)”, the lottery values of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) are defined.

  In the RT4 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviated “F_strong ice”), “47” (abbreviated “F_middle tier”) and “48” (abbreviated “ In the case of any of F_confirmation che)), as in the RT0 gaming state, any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (turning drum effect pattern 2) is selected. . In addition, in the RT4 gaming state, when the winning number is either “46” (abbreviated “F_strong Choi”) or “49” (abbreviated “F_chance prominence”), the lock number 0 (normal pattern) And one game lock of lock number 1 (turn drum effect pattern 1) is selected.

  Also, in the RT4 gaming state, if the winning number is either “24” (abbreviated “F_reach eye lip 1”) or “25” (abbreviated “F_reach eye lip 2”), the lock is made. The game lock of number 0 (normal pattern) is selected. Furthermore, in the RT4 gaming state, when the winning number is “1” (abbreviated “F_Normal Rip”), lock number 0 (normal pattern), lock number 4 (mid-stop to next game carnival transition) and One of lock number 5 (right first stop next game carnival transition) is selected.

  The game lock lottery table (part 5) is not only the game lock lottery table in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) described later, but also the sub gaming state is directly described later without passing through the XR (extreme rush) mode game described later It also doubles as a lottery table whether or not to shift to XRC (XR Carnival) mode game. Then, in the RT4 gaming state, when the lock number 4 is won using the gaming lock lottery table (part 5), the sub gaming state is described later in the next game by performing the first stop of the middle reel 3C. It decides to shift to XRC mode. Further, in the RT4 gaming state, when the lock number 5 is won using the gaming lock lottery table (part 5), the sub gaming state is described later in the next game by performing the first stop of the right reel 3R. It decides to shift to XRC mode.

[Continuously locked state lottery table]
In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state (ART state described later), when a game in XRC mode described later is being performed, a plurality of game locks (continuous lock) are executed in one reel acceleration period. Be done. The lottery table during the continuous lock state described here is used to determine the pattern (the number of times of locking, the lock timer, etc.) of the continuous lock performed during the acceleration process of the reel.

  The continuous lock state random determination table will be described with reference to FIG. This lottery table is referred to in the continuous game lock lottery process in the later-described game lock lottery process (see FIG. 258 described later).

  During the continuous lock state, the lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of remaining lottery numbers (continuous lock number) and the lottery value. When the value of the effect state described later is less than 5, the lottery value in the lottery table during the continuous lock state is doubled.

  The remaining lottery number (continuous lock number) is data related to the time set in the lock timer, and although not shown here, the time set in the lock timer when the remaining lottery number (continuous lock number) increases. Is set to be long. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of ART-superimposed games in the XRC mode is set to increase as the number of remaining lottery numbers (continuous lock number) increases (when the time set in the lock timer increases) (described later) See Fig. 158 XR Carnival Add-on Table 1).

  The “number of locks” in the XR carnival additional addition table 1 in FIG. 158 described later is a value obtained by dividing the number of remaining lottery numbers (continuous lock number) by 2 and rounding off the decimal part of the division result. Therefore, for example, the remaining lottery number (continuous lock number) "19" corresponds to the lock number "9".

  In the continuous game lock lottery process using the lottery table during the continuous lock state of the present embodiment, first, the effect random number values extracted from the predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65536) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified corresponding to (continuous lock number). Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction becomes negative (a “digit” occurs) at a predetermined remaining number of lottery numbers (continuous lock number), it means that the number of remaining lottery numbers (continuous lock number) is won.

<Configuration of Storage Area Provided in Main RAM>
Next, configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 53 is also provided with storage areas such as various control data used in various reel effects (various game locks) described above, various flags, various counters, etc.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area is configured by display combination storage areas 1 to 62 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storing areas 1 to 62, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the effective line Indicates On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the combination of symbols relating to winning and the combination of symbols serving as a trigger for transition to the RT gaming state are not displayed on the effective line.

  Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 62, when "1" is set to a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Also, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "off".

  In addition, the main RAM 53 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). Further, the carryover combination storage area is configured in the same manner as storage area 2 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. When one of “C_MB1” to “C_MB4” is determined as an internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (eg, "REP 1"-"REP 1"-"BEL 1" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the effective line Be done. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal combination combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Playing state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state flag storage area is configured of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  When “1” is stored (stands up) in a predetermined bit in each of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2, an operation of a bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is performed. Indicates For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the operation of the MB is performed, which indicates that the gaming state is the MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the structure of the operation stop button storage area will be described. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of one byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, in the case where the left stop button 17L is not yet pressed, that is, a valid stop button, “1” is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 51 identifies the stop button pressed this time and the stop button not yet pressed based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of one byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of pressing order of the stop button is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Symbol code storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the symbol of the reel stopped immediately before and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2 to 63) are stored for each valid line. Ru. In addition, after all the reels stop, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 63.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the prize operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read out from the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table (see FIG. 51), and the prize operation flag AND the data with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of valid lines are provided, symbol code storage areas equal in number to the number of valid lines are provided. In this case, the valid line may be changed according to the bet number or the game state.

[Import priority data storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the configuration of the leading priority data storage area will be described. The drawing priority order data storage area includes a left reel drawing priority order data storage area, a middle reel drawing priority order data storage area, and a right reel drawing priority order data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority order data storage area, a storage area of priority order data is provided for each type of reel.

  In each drawing priority order data storage area, drawing priority order data determined according to each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the drawing priority order data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the above-described stop table.

  The contents of priority priority data stored in the priority priority data storage area differ depending on the type of priority priority table number in the priority priority table (see FIG. 48) referenced when determining the priority data. . Further, the higher the value of the attraction priority data, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the retraction priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priorities among the symbols arranged on the circumferential surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the drawing priority order data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the circumferential surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the draw-in priority order data, one symbol is determined in accordance with the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 49 or 50).

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order of the reels will be described.

  FIG. 64 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stopping order during non-bonus (in non-MB), and corresponds to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stopping order of reels. Indicates the type of display combination. In FIG. 64, in order to simplify the description, only the internal winning combinations different according to the pressing order are shown as the role of the internal winning combination for the game.

  For example, when the data pointer is "2", the code names "R001" (G_RT0 transition ripple), "RT01" (G_upper row ripple), "RB01" (G_lower row ripple), and "RC01" as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combination according to “G_ middle lip” is won twice (see FIG. 39). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “left middle right” (stop order “123” in FIG. 64) or “right and left middle” (stop order “132” in FIG. 64), the code name “RT01” (G The symbol combinations of the internal winning combinations according to the upper row lip), “RB01” (G_lower row lip) and “RC01” (G_middle row lip) are stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 64), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 64), "right left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. ) Or “right middle left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 64), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 64, when the data pointer is any one of “17” to “22” and “24” to “29” and the pressing order of the stop button is forward pressing, When the stop button is pressed at a timing at which the internal winning combination (Replay combination) described in the column in the corresponding correspondence table (the column in which (*) in FIG. 64 is described) can not be stopped, another replay combination is displayed. It is configured to stop.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when the data pointer is “9” (when the immediate release pseudo bonus in XBB mode described later is won) and the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, Of the code names "R301" to "R311", the symbol combinations of display combinations other than the display combination according to the code name "R304" (G_RT3 transition lip_4) are preferentially stop-controlled on the activated line. That is, when the data pointer is "9" and the pushing order is "312" or "321", the symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus of XBB mode described later (symbol "DON"-"DON"-"DON ": Middle middle (don't match)) is, in effect, configured to be not displayed stop.

  FIG. 65 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) in the MB and the stopping order of the reels, and a display corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stopping order of the reels. Indicates the type (code name) of the role.

  For example, if the data pointer is "51", all the small winning combinations will be duplicated as internal winning combinations (see FIG. 40). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213"), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "BM01" (G_14 sheets bell) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. A medal is paid out. On the other hand, when the reel is stopped in the order other than "middle left and right", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "BL02" (G_15 sheets bell_2) or "BL03" (G_15 sheets bell_3) is stopped on the effective line Displayed and 15 medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the MB ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14 (see FIG. 30). Therefore, for example, when the data pointer "51" is acquired during MB, the reel is stopped in the order of "middle left and right" in the first game, and the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "BM01" is By displaying a stop on the effective line, it is possible to digest the unit game into two games in MB, and it is possible to obtain payout of a maximum of 29 medals (the net increase in medals is 23). That is, for example, when the data pointer "51" is acquired during MB, such large medal payout can be obtained by stopping the reel in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213") it can.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, the condition that the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "BL01" (G_15 sheets Bell_1) can be stopped and displayed on the effective line during the MB is that the data pointer is "58" And only when the stop order of the reels is “left middle right” (stop order “123”). That is, the internal winning combination associated with the code name “BL01” (G_15 sheets Bell_1) is provided as a so-called “rare role”, thereby suppressing monotonous gaming in the MB.

  In the non-MB game, the winning combination numbers “8”, “9”, “24”, “25”, “36”, “37”, “42” to “ra” in the present embodiment are used. It is an internal winning combination of "49" and the winning number "0 (missing)" in the RT2 to RT4 gaming state. In addition, in the game during MB, the internal winning combination of winning numbers "7", "26" and "27" is called "ra".

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order and RT transition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order of the reels, and the RT transition will be described. FIG. 66 is a correspondence table of internal winning combination (data pointer) and reel stopping order and RT transition, and a transition destination of RT gaming state corresponding to a combination of internal winning combination (data pointer) and reel stopping order Indicates

  For example, when the data pointer is “2” (abbreviated “F_RT0 for the rep”), as described in FIG. 64, when the reel is stopped in the order of “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, the code name The symbol combinations of the internal winning combinations according to "RT01" (G_upper row lip), "RB01" (G_lower row lip) and "RC01" (G_middle row lip) are stopped and displayed on the effective line. Since these display roles are not the transition role of the RT gaming state, in this case, the RT gaming state does not shift.

  On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in the order other than "left middle right" and "right and left middle", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Since this display combination is a transition combination to shift the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 31), in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

  Also, for example, when the data pointer is “12” (abbreviated “F_Don-4 transition 2nd”) or “13” (abbreviated “F_Don-4 transition 3rd”), the reel is “left middle right” or When stopping in the order of "right and left middle", an internal winning other than the internal winning combination according to the code name "R302" (G_RT3 transition lip 2) among the code names "R301" to "R303" and "R305" to "R306" The symbol combination of the winning combination (internal winning combination in the BB mode of the pseudo bonus described later) is preferentially displayed on the activated line and stopped, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. At this time, the sub game state is shifted to a BB (don / red 7) mode of a pseudo bonus described later.

  On the other hand, if the data pointer is "14" (abbreviated "F_RB-4 transition 2nd") or "15" (abbreviated "F_RB-4 transition 3rd"), the reel is "left middle right" or "left and right" If it is stopped in the order of “Me”, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name “R302” (G_RT3 transition lip_2) is stopped and displayed preferentially on the effective line, and the RT gaming state is RT3 gaming state Transition to simulated bonus) At this time, the sub-playing state shifts to an RB mode of pseudo bonus described later.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the RT gaming state transitions to the RT3 gaming state, the symbol combination of the transition combination differs according to the mode type in the transition destination pseudo bonus. Therefore, the player can recognize transition to a different simulated bonus game by the difference in symbol combination displayed at the time of transition to the RT3 gaming state.

  Note that “Reset”, “Maintenance” and “One-step UP” in parentheses after “No transition” described in the data pointer “32” to “35” column in the correspondence table in FIG. 66 will be described later. Indicates the transition of the lock state of

  In addition, “transition to RT3” is described in the stop order “312” and “321” columns of data pointers “17” to “19” and “23” in the correspondence table of FIG. 66. Since the data pointer is a data pointer acquired only in the RT3 gaming state, it is substantially "no transition". In addition, also in other data pointers, according to the depression timing of the stop button, there is a case where the transition part (replay part) which becomes the transition opportunity to the RT gaming state currently staying is displayed, but in this case In the correspondence table of FIG. 66, “No transition” is described.

<Game flow>
Next, in the pachi slot 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery operation in the various RT gaming states and the transition operation between the RT gaming states, which are controlled by the main CPU 51, will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 is a view showing a transition flow of the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 51, and FIG. 68 is a table summarizing the activation condition and the termination condition of each RT gaming state.

  Further, various code names indicating a transition combination serving as a transition trigger of the RT gaming state described in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 correspond to, for example, the code names defined in the symbol combination tables of FIG. Further, in FIG. 67, various gaming states (hereinafter referred to as a sub gaming state) related to the effects controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) are also described.

[Various RT gaming states]
In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of replay and their winning probability differ from each other are provided as the RT gaming state.

(1) RT0 gaming state The RT0 gaming state is an RT gaming state set at an initial state, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is low.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the replay role serving as an opportunity to shift to the RT0 gaming state, specifically, the replay role associated with the code name “R001” (RT0 transition rep) described in FIGS. 67 and 68 (hereinafter, RT0 transition replay Lottery) is carried out. In the RT0 gaming state, when the stop button is pressed irregularly while RT0 replay is internally won, the symbol combination relating to the RT0 replay is stopped and displayed on the activated line (winning).

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state, there may be a case where an internal winning combination associated with the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition point) described in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 is won. The symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition point) can not be stopped and displayed on the effective line the small winning combination according to "bell" in which the number of medals paid out is one. It is a symbol combination to be stopped and displayed, and it becomes a transition opportunity (transition role) to the RT1 gaming state.

(2) RT1 gaming state The RT1 gaming state is an RT gaming state set when the sub gaming state is a normal state described later, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is low.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the replay role serving as an opportunity to shift to the RT1 gaming state, specifically, the replay role corresponding to the code name “R101” (RT1 transition lip) described in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 (hereinafter referred to as RT1 transition It is called Replay). At this time, an RT1 transition replay of push selection 4 is randomly selected.

  Also, in the RT1 gaming state, if the push order 4-choice RT1 transition replay is internally won, the RT0 transition replay and the replay role serving as a trigger for transition to the RT2 gaming state, specifically, FIGS. 67 and 68. It is set so that the replay combination (hereinafter referred to as RT2 transition replay) corresponding to the code name “R201” (RT2 transition rep) described in is duplicated. Then, when irregular push is performed in a state in which the pushing order 4-time RT1 transition replay, RT0 transition replay and RT2 transition replay are won twice, there is a possibility that the RT0 transition replay or the RT2 transition replay will be won.

  In addition, in the RT1 gaming state, replays corresponding to code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition ripple) described in FIG. 67 and FIG. In some cases, a player (hereinafter referred to as RT3 transition replay) may be won alone (separately from RT1 transition replay). In the RT1 gaming state, the probability of winning the RT3 transition replay is very low, and the RT3 transition replay is a so-called rare role.

  Furthermore, in the RT1 gaming state, there may be a case where an internal winning combination associated with code names “BP01” and “BP02” (one pressing failure) described in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 is won. These roles are small roles in which one medal is paid out when the pressing order is misplaced due to irregular pressing, and the winning combination of this small role serves as a transition opportunity (transition role) to the RT0 gaming state.

(3) RT2 gaming state The RT2 gaming state is an RT gaming state set when the sub gaming state is a state called "between flags", and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is high.

  The RT2 gaming state includes an RT3 transition replay and a replay role serving as a trigger for transition to the RT4 gaming state, specifically, a replay role corresponding to the code name “R401” (RT4 transition lip) described in FIGS. 67 and 68. In the RT gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “RT4 transition replay”), winning (establishment) is achieved with high probability. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, RT0 transition replay is also set to overlap when RT3 transition replay and RT4 transition replay are internally won. And, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is other than the predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is incorrect), the RT0 transition replay is won.

  In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, the internal winning combination according to the code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one pressing failure), which is a small winning combination that triggers transition to the RT0 gaming state, or to the RT1 gaming state There is also a case where an internal winning combination associated with the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition point) serving as a transition opportunity (transition role) is won.

(4) RT3 gaming state The RT3 gaming state (first replay time state) is an RT gaming state set when the sub gaming state is a simulated bonus described later, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is high. .

  The RT3 gaming state is an RT gaming state in which the RT4 transition replay is won (established) with high probability when the pressing order of the stop button is a predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is correct). In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, when the RT4 transition replay is internally won, the RT1 transition replay is also duplicated. And, in this case, when the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect, the RT1 transition replay is won.

  In addition, in the RT3 gaming state, transition to the RT1 gaming state or internal winning combination (small part) according to the code name "BP01" and "BP02" (one pressing failure one sheet) that will trigger transition to the RT0 gaming state There is also a case where the internal winning combination associated with the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition point) as a trigger is won.

(5) RT4 gaming state The RT4 gaming state (second replay time state) is an RT gaming state set when the sub gaming state is the ART state described later, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is high. .

  The RT4 gaming state includes RT1 transition replay (in particular, the replay role of winning number “1” (abbreviated “F_normal rep”)), and RT2 transition replay (in particular, winning number “32” (abbreviated “F_RT4-2 transition 213”) ) To “33” (abbreviated “F_RT4-2 transition 321”) is an RT gaming state in which it is established (winning) with high probability.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT1 transition replay is also duplicated when the RT2 transition replay is internally won. And, in this case, when the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect, the RT1 transition replay is won.

  Also, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT3 transition replay, specifically, the case where the replay names corresponding to the code names “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition ripple) described in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 alone are won. is there. In the RT4 gaming state, the probability of winning the RT3 transition replay is very low, and the RT3 transition replay is a so-called rare role.

  In addition, in the RT4 gaming state, transition to the RT1 gaming state or internal winning combination according to the code name "BP01" and "BP02" (one pressing failure one sheet) which is a minor combination that becomes a transition trigger to the RT0 gaming state The internal winning combination associated with the code name “KB01” (abbreviated “G_RT1 transition point”) as a trigger may be awarded.

[Transition flow of RT gaming state]
Next, the transition flow between the various RT gaming states described above will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the condition for transition between the RT gaming states (the activation of each RT gaming state is displayed that the symbol combination relating to a predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Condition and end condition). The control of the transition operation between the RT gaming states is performed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) referring to an RT transition table (see FIG. 31) described later.

  First, when Pachislot 1 is in the initial state (for example, at the time of shipment), or in any of RT1 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, code name "R001" (RT0 transition ripple), "BP01" or "BP02" (pushing order) When the internal winning combination relating to one failure) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state. Then, the termination condition of the RT0 gaming state is, as shown in FIG. 68, a stop display of the internal winning combination according to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition point). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition point) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state is from the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. It shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

  The termination condition of the RT1 gaming state is, as shown in FIG. 68, code names “R001” (RT0 transition ripple), “R201” (RT2 transition ripple), “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition ripple), “BP01” It is a stop display of the internal winning combination which concerns on either "" and "BP02" (pushing order failure 1 sheet).

  Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination according to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (one pressing failure) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (prize (prize) In the case where the player has made a game, as shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Also, in the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name "R201" (RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state is from RT1 gaming state to RT2 Transition to the game state. Furthermore, in the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to any of the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state Is transferred from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  The end conditions of the RT2 gaming state are, as shown in FIG. 68, code names “R001” (RT0 transition ripple), “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition ripple), “R401” (RT4 transition ripple), “KB01 (RT1 transition point), "BP01" and "BP02" (pushing order failure 1 sheet) is a stop display of the internal winning combination according to any one.

  Therefore, when the internal winning combination according to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (one pressing failure) is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the RT2 gaming state (prize (prize) In the case where the player has made a game, as shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination pertaining to any of the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state Is transferred from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  Also, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name "R401" (RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), as shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state Is transferred from the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Furthermore, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition point) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  As for the termination condition of the RT3 gaming state, as shown in FIG. 68, the code names “R101” (RT1 transition ripple), “R401” (RT4 transition ripple), “KB01” (RT1 transition), “BP01” and “BP02” It is a stop display of the internal winning combination according to any of (pushing order failure 1 sheet).

  Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination according to the code name "R101" (RT1 transition lip) or "KB01" (RT1 transition point) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), As shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination according to the code name "R401" (RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state is from RT3 gaming state to RT4. Transition to the game state. Furthermore, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination according to the code name “BP01” or “BP02” (one pressing failure) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state is from RT3 gaming state to RT0 gaming Transition to the state.

  As for the termination condition of the RT4 gaming state, as shown in FIG. 68, the code names “R001” (RT0 transition ripple), “R101” (RT1 transition ripple), “R201” (RT2 transition ripple), “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip), “KB01” (RT1 transition point), “BP01” or “BP02” (pushing order failure 1 sheet) is a stop display of the internal winning combination according to any one.

  Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination according to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (one pressing failure) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (prize (prize) In the case where the player has made a game, as shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Also, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination according to the code name “R101” (RT1 transition lip) or “KB01” (RT1 transition point) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when a prize is won), As shown at 67, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Also, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name "R201" (RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state is from RT4 gaming state to RT2 Transition to the game state. In addition, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination pertaining to any of the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (when winning), the RT gaming state Is transferred from the RT4 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

<Various sub game states>
Next, various sub gaming states related to the effects controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) will be described. In the present embodiment, various sub gaming states mainly referred to as "normal state", "simulated bonus", "ART state" and "BGZ (billiget zone)" are provided as the sub gaming states. Although not described here, as will be described in the flow of various control processing by the sub CPU 81 described later, as the sub gaming state "ART preparation state", "confirmed screen state", "pseudo bonus end standby state Etc. are also provided.

[Normal state]
The normal state is a sub-gaming state that is executed when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state and the non-ART gaming state.

  In the normal state, the lottery to the simulated bonus is performed for each game, and when the rare combination is won, the sub gaming state shifts to the simulated bonus. In the normal state, when the number of digested games after the end of the simulated bonus reaches a predetermined ceiling game number (for example, 1280 games etc.), the winning of the simulated bonus ("XBB mode" in this embodiment) is determined. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the transition flow of the RT gaming state of FIG. 67, the transition trigger of the display combination does not directly transition from the RT0 or RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub gaming state does not directly shift from the normal state to the ART state based on the result of the internal lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub gaming state may directly shift from the normal state to the ART state based on the result of the internal lottery (by the transition trigger such as the display combination).

  In the present embodiment, when the number of digested games in the normal state reaches a specific ceiling game number (XR ceiling game number described later), the winning of the XR mode (ART state) is determined, in this case. , Sub gaming state is directly transferred from the normal state to the ART state.

  In addition, in the normal state, transition lottery to each game, BGZ is performed, and if the lottery is won, the sub gaming state shifts to BGZ. In the present embodiment, the expected degree of transition to the BGZ changes according to the number of digested games in the normal state after the end of the simulated bonus.

  For example, if the number of digested games is 1 to 100, "in expectation", if the number of digested games is 181 to 210 or 281 to 310, "small in expectation", the number of digested games is 481 to 510. In some cases, the expectation for transition to BGZ changes in a pattern such as “expected degree is low” and the number of digested games is “evening 100%”. The relationship between the number of digested games and the expectation of transition to BGZ can be found in various BGZ lottery tables determined by lottery using the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 179 described later). It is prescribed.

  The BGZ lottery table is set after the last simulated bonus ends, and is maintained until the next simulated bonus ends. Therefore, during that time, the BGZ lottery table set after the previous simulated bonus end is maintained regardless of whether the sub gaming state is the normal state or the ART state.

[ART status]
The ART state (special gaming state) is a sub gaming state executed during the RT4 gaming state. In the present embodiment, an ART game of 50 games is performed.

  In the ART state, as in the normal state, lottery of pseudo bonus is performed for each game, and if the lottery is won, the sub gaming state is shifted to the pseudo bonus. Even in the ART state, when the number of digested games after the end of the simulated bonus reaches a predetermined ceiling game number, winning of the simulated bonus is determined.

  Further, in the ART state, as in the normal state, the transition lottery to each game, BGZ is performed, and if the lottery is won, the sub gaming state transitions to the BGZ. In addition, the transition expectation to BGZ at this time changes in accordance with the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus, as in the normal state.

  Furthermore, in the ART state, there are provided a plurality of types of game modes that provide a more advantageous game state to the player. Specifically, game modes called “XR (extreme rush) mode”, “XRC (XR carnival) mode” and “rocket mode” are provided.

  In the present embodiment, in a game in an ART state other than the various game modes described above, when a correct effect is given to a predetermined effect (two-or-one effect) called “BG (billiget) challenge” (if BG challenge is successful The sub gaming state shifts to XR mode). In addition, in the BG challenge, a player performs a selection operation effect of a choice, and success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined based on the selection result, or the player performs a selection operation. Even if not selected (when not selected), success or failure of BG challenge may be determined.

  Also, when the number of digested games in the ART state reaches a specific ceiling game number (XR ceiling game number described later), the winning of the XR mode is determined.

  Furthermore, in a game in an ART state other than the various game modes, the sub game state shifts to the rocket mode when the shift lottery to the rocket mode is won.

  In the ART state, the sub gaming state is transferred to the XRC mode when the player has won the transition lottery to the XRC mode in the XR mode game, but the sub gaming state is the XR mode although it has a very low probability. There is also a case where it shifts directly to XRC mode without intervention.

  Below, each game content of XR mode, XRC mode, and rocket mode is demonstrated.

(1) XR mode In the XR mode (predetermined mode) game, continuous lottery of XR mode is performed every game, and it is determined in the first game of XR mode until it leaks to this continuous lottery (is not won). The predetermined basic ART game number is added to the number of ART games currently remaining (hereinafter referred to as the number of ART remaining games) for each game. In the present embodiment, any of 5, 10, 20 and 30 games is selected as the number of basic ART games.

  Further, in the XR mode, a plurality of types of continuation modes (XR continuation mode) in which XR continuation rates (50% to 95%) are different from one another are provided. In the XR mode, when the internal winning combination is held, the winning combination will continue with 100% probability regardless of the XR continuous mode, but when the internal winning combination is set to other than the rare combination, the XR continuous mode may be used. XR continuation rates are different.

  In addition, in the XR mode game, at the time of winning a rare, an additional addition of the number of ART games is performed separately from the above-described number of basic ART games.

  Furthermore, in the XR mode game, a predetermined addition parameter called "combo number" is provided, and when the combo number reaches a specified number (specific combo number), the number of basic ART games and the number of ART games associated with winning a rare prize In addition to the additional addition, an additional addition of the number of ART games is further performed (hereinafter, this benefit is referred to as a combo bonus). In the present embodiment, the combo number is not only incremented by one for each unit game in the XR mode, but is also incremented by one when winning the rare combination (combo number increment). That is, when the internal winning combination of the rare combination is made in the unit game in the XR mode, the number of combos is increased by two in total.

  In the XR mode game, when the number of XR continuation games becomes two or more, the lottery for transition to the XRC mode is performed every game, and when winning the lottery, the transition to the XRC mode is decided. At this time, in the case where the player holds the internal winning combination, the lottery value of the XRC mode transition lottery is appropriately set so that the XRC mode transition lottery can be easily won.

  As described above, when a player wins a rare role in a game in XR mode, in the unit game, the bonus of winning the XR continuous lottery (determination to continue) and the additional addition of the number of ART games is provided, and a combo bonus The number of combos defining the occurrence condition of is additionally added (combo addition). Therefore, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the number of unit games (the number of digested games) until the combo number reaches the specified number and the combo bonus is generated is reduced, and the combo bonus is easily generated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the player holds the rare role in the XR mode game, the form of the addition operation of the number of ART games in the subsequent games (occurrence of combo bonus) can be influenced, and the relation between the games It can be done by enhancing the character, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) XRC mode In the XRC mode (specific mode) game, as in the XR mode, the continuous lottery of the XRC mode is performed every game, and the number of ART games is the number of ART games until the continuous lottery leaks (does not win). , Will be added. However, the addition form of the number of ART games in the XRC mode is different from that in the XR mode.

  Specifically, in the game in the XRC mode, the addition of the number of ART games occurs every stop of the reel for each game, and the addition of the number of ART games occurs even after the third stop. Then, in the XRC mode, predetermined effects including a reel action (continuous game lock) are performed in conjunction with the addition operation of the number of ART games.

  Specifically, first, the number of ART games to be added at each stop of the reel is determined according to the content (number of locks) of the reel action (continuous game lock) determined at the start of the game (during lever operation) Ru. Next, by executing the determined reel action during the reel acceleration period, the number of ART games to be added per stop of the reel is informed. At this time, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 is notified of the number of added games determined according to the content of the reel action.

  After that, each time the reel is stopped, the number of added games determined according to the content of the reel action is added to the number of ART remaining games. At this time, each time the reel is stopped, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that a specific character appears and performs a predetermined operation) is performed by the liquid crystal display device 11, and it is determined according to the content of the reel action. The number of added games played is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Then, after the third stop, an effect (combination effect) in which the content of the effect performed for each reel is combined is performed, and the number of ART games corresponding to the combination effect is added to the number of remaining ART games. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 11 is also notified of the number of ART games to be added according to the combined effect. In the present embodiment, the additional number of ART game numbers corresponding to the combination effect is determined by lottery at the time of lever operation.

  Then, after the third stop, when the continuation of the XRC mode is won by the lever operation of the next game, notification of the number of ART games added for each additional reel stop by the reel action described above, effects for each stop of reels, and the number of ART games The addition processing and the combination rendering after the third stop and the addition processing of the number of ART games are repeated. In the present embodiment, the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed at least two games from the start of the XRC mode game.

  In the present embodiment, in the XRC mode game, the reel action (continuous game lock) is always performed at the start of the game. Therefore, the continuous lottery in the XRC mode is also used in the continuous game lock lottery performed by the main CPU 51 at the start of the game, and when the continuous game lock lottery is won, the continuation of the XRC mode is won.

  In this embodiment, as a transition form from the ART state to the XRC mode, there is a form in which the ART state is transited to the XRC mode via the XR mode, and a form in which the ART state is directly transited to the XRC mode without via the XR mode Is provided.

  In the former transition mode, there are two transition modes from XR mode to XRC mode, but regarding the transition mode, among the transition modes to XRC mode and the operation state management method of XRC mode described below I will explain in detail.

  In the latter transition mode, as described in the game lock lottery table (part 5) of FIG. 56, the lock number 4 is won in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) (a winning number “1” is won) and This corresponds to the transition to the XRC mode when the middle reel 3C is stopped for the first time, or the lock number 5 is won (the winning number "1" is won) and the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time. .

(3) Mode of transition to XRC mode and management method of operation status of XRC mode As described above, since XRC mode always involves the reel action, the mode of transition to XRC mode and operation of XRC mode are also performed in main CPU 51 Manage the situation. So, in this embodiment, a parameter called "rendering state (0 to 6)" is set to manage these situations. Note that the value of this effect state is stored in the main RAM 53.

  The rendering state 0 to the rendering state 2 correspond to a state in which the occurrence probability of the reel action provided in the XR mode is different from each other (hereinafter, also referred to as a locked state), and the rendering state 2 corresponds to the XRC mode winning state. Then, in the effect state 2, when the value of the effect game counter for managing the precursor game number in the XRC mode becomes 0, the game in the XRC mode is started.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as described in the correspondence table in FIG. 66, the transition between the lock states is determined by a combination of the internal winning combination and the pressing order of the stop button. For example, in the state where the internal winning combinations of winning numbers (data pointers) 32-35 are won, the transition state ("reset", "maintained" or "one-step UP") of the locked state differs according to the stop order of the reels. . Then, in the XR mode, when the locked state is reset, the effect state shifts to the effect state 0, and when the locked state is maintained, the effect state is also maintained. When the locked state is raised by one step in the effect state 0, the effect state shifts to the effect state 1, and when the locked state is increased by one step in the effect state 1, the effect state is the effect state 2 Migrate to That is, if the lock state can be increased by two stages from the effect state 0, it becomes the winning state of the XRC mode.

  In addition, the rendering state 3 corresponds to the state of the first game in the XRC mode, and the rendering state 4 corresponds to the state of the second game in the XRC mode. In the production states 3 and 4, since continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed, each lottery value defined in the continuous lock state lottery table (see FIG. 57) in this state in order to make the continuation rate 100%. Is doubled.

  The effect state 5 corresponds to the state after the third game in the XRC mode, and the effect state 6 corresponds to the end waiting state for the XRC mode. Therefore, the effect state 6 is set when the lever is operated and cleared when the game is over.

  In addition, as a transition form from XR mode to XRC mode, the lock state is upgraded from presentation state 0 or 1 to a level to generate presentation state 2 (winning state of XRC mode) (hereinafter, first transition form) In the effect state 0 or 1, there is provided a form (hereinafter, referred to as a second transition form) of directly transitioning to the XRC mode without raising the lock state.

  In the first transition mode, it is necessary to level up the locked state (represented state) one level at a time, so as described in the correspondence table of FIG. 66, in addition to winning a predetermined internal winning combination, the stop button The sub gaming state shifts to the XRC mode only when is pressed in a predetermined push order (in the correct push order).

  Further, in the first transition mode, “2” is set to the value of the effect game counter for managing the precursor game number in the XRC mode, and the XRC mode game is started from the next game. In the first transition mode, when the XR mode ends in the period of the precursor game, the push order for “resetting” the lock state is notified, so the effect state is in the effect state 0 in the period of the precursor game The game in XRC mode may not start.

  On the other hand, since the second transition mode corresponds to winning the XRC direct transition lottery performed in the XR mode, the rendering state is changed from rendering state 0 or 1 to rendering state 2 without raising the lock state. Transition. In this case, in the present embodiment, “1” is set to the value of the effect game counter, and the XRC mode game is started from the next game.

  In ART state, lock number 4 is won and middle reel 3C is stopped for the first time, or lock number 5 is won and right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, and the sub gaming state is directly from XRC mode from ART state In the case of transition to, "2" is set in the effect state, and "2" is set in the value of the effect game counter. Therefore, in this case, the XRC mode game is started one after another.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in either the mode of directly transitioning from the ART state to the XRC mode, or the mode of upgrading the lock state from the XR mode to the transition to the XRC mode, a predetermined internal winning combination is achieved. Not only winning, but it is also necessary to press the stop button in a predetermined pressing order (correcting the pressing order). So, in this embodiment, generation | occurrence | production of a reel action (game lock) can be controlled by the sub control circuit 42 which performs a process of pushing order navigation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reel action (game lock) is generated, the pushing order that is the correct answer differs depending on the winning classification (winning content). In the present embodiment, in a state in which the XRC mode is won, an effect (an effect indicating the transition to the XRC mode) indicating whether or not to generate a reel action is performed, and navigation in order of pressing the stop button ( Hereinafter, push order navigation is performed), but at this time, the push order of the notified correct answer changes according to the winning classification. That is, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of pressing orders of correct answers for generating the XRC mode, which are notified by pressing order navigation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not the occurrence of the reel action (the occurrence of the XRC mode).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the mode of transition to the XRC mode and the operation status of the XRC mode are managed by one identifier of the rendering state, the secondary control circuit 42 does not increase the number of RT states. Lock) can be controlled.

  In the present embodiment, the mode of transition to the XRC mode and the operation state of the XRC mode are managed by one identifier of the rendering state, but the state corresponding to each value of the rendering state described above is a flag, a counter, etc. May be provided and managed individually.

(4) Rocket Mode In the rocket mode (special mode), a game is played for a predetermined number of predetermined games (50 games in the present embodiment), and during this period, a pseudo bonus is won with an extremely high probability. Specifically, in the rocket mode, the part (the internal winning combination of winning numbers 24 to 29) related to "reach eye lip" wins with high probability. Then, in the pseudo bonus lottery process in the rocket mode, when the internal winning combination is "reach eye lip", a pseudo bonus ("BB (don BB) mode" described later) is won with an extremely high probability (see later described Refer to the fake bonus lottery (during rocket) table shown in 83).

  In rocket mode, the symbol combination related to the "reach eye lip" won internally is stopped and displayed on the judgment line, and when the stock of the pseudo bonus ("BB" mode described later) is determined, the pseudo bonus is stocked as 1G run stock. Ru. Then, the stocked simulated bonus is collectively released after the rocket mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, the part associated with the "reach eye lip" is stopped and displayed when the stop button is pressed in order. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the ART period game period other than rocket mode, push order navigation (notice of irregular push) is performed to avoid the display of the part related to "reach eye lip", and during the rocket mode game period. Does not perform pushing order navigation, or notifies the pushing order in which the part associated with "reach eye lip" is displayed (does not notify information for avoiding display of the part associated with "reach eye lip"). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 can control the stop mode of the symbol combination in the rocket mode game and the stop mode of the symbol combination in the ART state game other than the rocket mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the final game in the rocket mode period, the continuous lottery of the rocket mode is performed, and when the lottery is won, the game of the rocket mode of the predetermined number of games is played again. When the simulated bonus is not won during the rocket mode period of the predetermined number of games (when the simulated bonus is not stocked), the continuation of the rocket mode is determined with a probability of 100%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a rocket mode capable of stocking pseudo bonus with an extremely high probability is provided during the operation period of ART. That is, in the ART period game, the player is provided with a very advantageous state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game during the ART period.

[BGZ]
BGZ (predetermined game state) is a chance zone in which the BG challenge described above occurs with high probability.

  The game of BGZ occurs in both the normal state and the ART state. Therefore, the game of BGZ (hereinafter referred to as "normally BGZ") after the transition of the sub game state from the normal state to the BGZ is executed in the RT0 or RT1 game state. On the other hand, the game of BGZ (hereinafter referred to as BGZ during ART) after the sub gaming state has shifted from the ART state to BGZ is executed in the RT4 gaming state.

  And, in BGZ during ART, push order navigation is performed. In the normal middle BGZ, there may be a case where push order navigation is performed (when BGZ mode 2 described later is won).

  In addition, since the number of ART games is not subtracted during ART BGZ games, the number of ART games remaining at the time of BGZ transition when the sub gaming state returns to ART state after BGZ in ART is over The ART game is resumed.

  In BGZ, a BG challenge occurs in the next game when the internal winning combination (winning numbers 38 to 41) related to "BELL" is won, or when it is won the rare role. In this BG challenge in BGZ, success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined based on the alternative selection operation by the player, or the selection operation by the player may not be performed ( When not selected), BG challenge may be determined as success or failure. When the player performs a selection operation in the BG challenge, one of the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R (see FIGS. 2 and 3) of the pachislot 1 is used as the player. The effect is to make it select and touch.

  When BG challenge is successful in BGZ during normal times, the benefits of XR mode and ART confirmation are given. In BGZ, a unit game (game) of a predetermined number of games (7 games in the present embodiment) is normally performed, but in the normal BGZ game, BGZ ends in a game which has succeeded in the BG challenge. When the BG challenge succeeds in the normal BGZ, the sub gaming state shifts to the ART state, and the XR mode game is played.

  On the other hand, when BG challenge is successful in BGZ (super BGZ) during ART, a privilege of determining XR mode is given. Furthermore, in BGZ during ART, even if the BG challenge is successful, BGZ does not end, and BGZ is played until the predetermined number of games are consumed. Then, in the BGZ during ART, a benefit (determination of the XR mode) is given for each success of the BG challenge during a predetermined number of games, and XR modes for the number of successes are stocked.

  In BGZ during ART mentioned above, BGZ does not end even if BG challenge is successful at an early stage of the period of the predetermined number of games, so the state with high occurrence probability of BG challenge is until the end of the period of predetermined number of games You can continue to enjoy. So, in this embodiment, the interest of the game in BGZ in ART can be heightened more.

  Furthermore, in BGZ during ART, since push-by-step navigation is performed to win an internal winning combination related to "BELL", the occurrence probability of BG challenge is significantly increased as compared to that during BGZ during normal. In addition, since the player can directly recognize that the occurrence probability of the BG challenge is increased due to the presence or absence of the push order navigation, there is no fear of distrust of the game.

  In the seventh game of BGZ, a BG challenge occurs in the next game (eighth game) even when the internal winning combination pertaining to “BELL” is won, or when the rare role is won, and BGZ It will be in an extended state.

[Simulation bonus]
The simulated bonus (specific gaming state) is a sub gaming state executed during the RT3 gaming state.

  In this embodiment, three game modes are provided in the simulated bonus. Specifically, three types of "BB mode", "RB mode" and "XBB (extreme BB) mode" are provided. Moreover, RB mode is divided into two types, "NRB mode" and "SRB mode."

  The simulated bonus is performed when the simulated bonus lottery process is won in the normal state or the ART state. Further, this pseudo bonus lottery process also determines the winning type (one of BB mode, RB mode and XBB mode) of the pseudo bonus. In the present embodiment, when the RB mode is won in the ART state, the SRB mode is entered.

  In addition, when winning the ART in the game after the sub gaming state is shifted from the normal state to the simulated bonus, the subsequent simulated bonus game is the game after the sub gaming state is shifted from the ART state to the simulated bonus A similar game is played.

  The contents of each game mode of the simulated bonus will be described below.

(1) BB Mode In this embodiment, 60 games are played in the BB mode. Then, in the BB mode game, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 22) relating to “Don match (lower match, upper match, diagonal match)” is stopped and displayed on the judgment line, When the notification to that effect occurs, the winning of ART and XR mode is decided.

  The stop display of the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the "Don match" and the notification to that effect are carried out when the don match permission flag described later is in the on state. Further, in the BB mode, a plurality of types of notification occurrence of don match are prepared, and the player can select a predetermined notification occurrence form from them.

  In addition, in the BB mode game, when the symbol combination of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination of winning number 23) relating to "Mid-level match (middle match)" is stopped and displayed on the judgment line, XBB mode is 1G Stock as stock. Then, after the BB mode game is over, stock in the XBB mode is released in 1G series.

(2) RB (NRB and SRB) mode In RB (NRB and SRB) mode games, the termination condition is not the number of digested games, but a push order navigation performed when the player according to "BELL" is won internally. It is defined by the number of times (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of navigation). That is, in the RB mode game, the termination condition is managed by the number of bell navigations, and when the number of bell navigations reaches a predetermined number, the game in RB mode is ended.

  In the NRB mode, when the period of stay in the NRB mode reaches a predetermined number of games, the grant of the XR mode (ART) (benefit grant) is decided, and the transition to the SRB mode is also decided. In addition, in the NRB mode, each game, the number of bell navigator addition lottery is performed, when the internal part of the rare role is won, the addition of the bell navigation number wins with high probability. And, when winning the addition lottery of the number of bell navigation, the number of bell navigation corresponding to the winning type is added to the number of bell navigation currently remaining.

  In the SRB mode, the additional lottery of the number of ART games is performed for each game, and when the lottery is won, the number of additional games corresponding to the winning type is added to the number of ART remaining games. In addition, when the number of games digested in the SRB mode (the number of staying games) reaches the specific game number (when the value of the XR lottery mode during RB becomes “2” to “6” described later), the predetermined number The number of ART games is added (except at the time of winning of the role related to “Don match permission” and “Dong permission”). For example, when the number of staying games in the SRB mode reaches a specific game number such that the value of the XR lottery mode in RB below becomes “3”, a predetermined ART game number of 10 games or more is added. (See FIG. 127 described later).

  In addition, in the RB (NRB and SRB) mode, when the game of the specified game number is consumed (at the time when the specified game is achieved), the XR lottery is performed, and in this embodiment, the XR lottery is performed with 100% probability. And ART also wins. Then, the corresponding XR mode is stocked.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the termination condition of the simulated bonus is the number of bell navigations, a condition that can not be directly defined by the number of unit game digests in the termination condition (in the process of digestion of multiple unit games A condition that changes stepwise is included. On the other hand, the award condition of the benefit in the period of the simulated bonus is defined by the number of times of unit game digestion. Thus, the following effects can be obtained by making the management method of the termination condition of the pseudo bonus different from the management method of the privilege giving condition.

  For example, in the case where an ART is won in a game (a game in NRB mode) after the sub gaming state has shifted from a normal state to a simulated bonus (if a privilege is awarded), a specific game in a subsequent game (a game in SRB mode) When the number of games is consumed, a predetermined ART game number is given as an additional benefit. Therefore, for example, in the NRB mode, an operation related to the termination condition of the RB mode, that is, when the award is given without generating the navigation (when ART (XR) wins), then, In the game of (the game in SRB mode), the probability that a further benefit (addition of the number of ART games) is given is high.

  That is, in the RB mode game, the process relating to winning of ART (XR) (granting of benefits) is important. Therefore, in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the player to get bored in the game period of the RB mode, and to further improve the interest of the game in the RB mode.

<Structure of data table stored in sub ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 252.

[Simulation bonus lottery table]
First, various pseudo bonus lottery tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery table is used when performing pseudo bonus lottery in various sub gaming states.

  The pseudo bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type of the pseudo bonus and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination.

  In the pseudo bonus lottery process using the pseudo bonus lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are added to the pseudo bonus lottery table. The lottery value of the winning classification of the specified pseudo bonus is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" is generated), the winning type of the pseudo bonus at that time is won.

(1) Pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table Referring to FIGS. 69 to 74, various pseudo bonus lottery (normal) tables used in the pseudo bonus lottery process in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286 described later). explain.

  FIG. 69 shows a structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 1). The simulated bonus lottery (normal) table (1) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “0” and the simulated bonus is “at non stock time”. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 2). The simulated bonus lottery (normal) table (part 2) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “1” and the simulated bonus is “non-stock time”. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (3). The simulated bonus lottery (ordinary) table (3) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is "2" and the simulated bonus is "at non stock time".

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 4). The simulated bonus lottery (normal) table (4) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “0” and the simulated bonus is “at stock”. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 5). The simulated bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 5) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “1” and the simulated bonus is “at stock”. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 6). The simulated bonus lottery (ordinary) table (6) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is "2" and the simulated bonus is "at stock".

  In this embodiment, four types of simulated bonus lottery modes ("0" to "3") having different types of winning simulated bonus, winning probability (lottery value), etc. are provided, but simulated bonus lottery (normal) The table is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is any one of "0" to "2". Further, for example, “between non-flags” in which the simulated bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 69 and the like is referred to means that the simulated bonus is not stocked in the current unit game. On the other hand, "between flags" with which the simulated bonus lottery (normal) table in FIG. 72 is referred to, for example, means that the simulated bonus is stocked in the current unit game.

  Here, stock types of various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, “normal stock”, “priority stock”, and “1G continuous stock” are provided as stock types of various game modes. In the "normal stock", various modes (BB, RB, XBB) in the pseudo bonus, the XR mode in the ART state, the BGZ, and the like are stocked. Also, only the XR mode is stocked in the "preferential stock". Therefore, in the following, "preferential stock" will be referred to as "XR preferential stock". Furthermore, the “1G continuous stock” is stocked with, for example, a simulated bonus won in the rocket mode.

  Next, the winning type of the simulated bonus defined in the simulated bonus lottery (normal) table will be described. Pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table, as the winning bonus type of fake bonus, RB win (early release), RB win (after release), red 7 BB win (early release), red 7 BB win (after release), Don BB win (Pre-release), Don-BB winning (post-release), Don-BB winning (immediate release), XBB1 winning (pre-release), XBB1 winning (post-release), XBB1 winning (immediate release), XBB2 winning (immediate release) and non The award is prescribed.

  Note that “red 7 BB” and “don BB” correspond to the pseudo bonus BB mode, and “XBB 1” and “XBB 2” correspond to the pseudo bonus XBB mode. Also, "preemption" means that the corresponding simulated bonus is stored at the beginning of the normal stock, in which case the simulated bonus of "preceding" is the first in various game stocks stored in the normal stock. To be executed. "Post-release" means that the corresponding simulated bonus is stored at the end of the normal stock, in which case after the game of various game stocks already stored in the normal stock is digested, the "after" The "release" pseudo bonus is executed. "Immediate release" means that the simulated bonus won from the next game is started.

  Also, the contents of various internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (ordinary) table are as follows. The "losing 1" corresponds to the case in which "losing" is won during the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. "Dismiss 2" corresponds to the case of winning "Dismiss" in RT gaming state other than RT0 gaming state and RT1 gaming state.

  "Normal replay" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "1". "High RT Rep" is a replay role other than "Normal Rep".

  The "pushing order bell" is a small part of the "bell" internally winning in the data pointers "39" to "41". The "middle bell" is a small part of the "bell" internally won in the data pointer "38". "15 sheets bell" is a small part related to "bell" internally won in data pointer "36".

  "Weak ice" is a small part of "ice" internally won in the data pointer "42". The "strong ice" is a small part of the "ice" internally won in the data pointer "43". The "MB middle role 3" is a role that internally wins with the data pointers "53" to "57". "R2 ice" corresponds to the case where the lock number "2" is won and the small part associated with the "ice" of the data pointer "43" or "44" is internally won.

  The "weak cherry" is a small part of the "cherry" internally won in the data pointer "45". "Strong cherries" is a small part related to "cherries" internally won in the data pointer "46". The "middle row cherry" is a small part of the "cherry" internally winning in the data pointer "47". The "determined cherries" is a small part of the "cherries" internally won in the data pointer "48".

  "The chance eye" is a small part winning internally with the data pointer "49". “MB” is a bonus internally won with the data pointer “50”. "MB middle role 1" is a role played internally by the data pointers "51", "52", and "59" to "86". "MB middle role 2" is a role played internally by the data pointer "58".

  "Leach Eye Lips 1 and 2" is a replay role played internally with the data pointers "24" and "25". "Leach eye trip 3, 4, 5" is a replay role played internally with the data pointers "26" to "28".

  The "right match" is a replay role played internally with the data pointer "8". The "right middle row don match" is a replay role played internally with the data pointer "9". The "right middle row don match R3" corresponds to the case where the lock number "3" is won and the replay role related to the data pointer "9" is internally won.

(2) Pseudo bonus lottery (in ART) table With reference to FIGS. 75 to 80, various pseudo bonus lottery (in ART) tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table is an ART preparation process (see FIG. 289 described later), an ART during process described later (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), and an XR process (described later). It is used in the pseudo bonus lottery process in each process of the XR carnival middle process (see FIG. 301 described later) and FIGS.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 1). The simulated bonus lottery (during ART) table (1) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “0” and the simulated bonus is “non-stock time”. FIG. 76 shows a structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 2). The simulated bonus lottery (during ART) table (2) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “1” and the simulated bonus is “non-stock time”. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 3). The simulated bonus lottery (during ART) table (3) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “2” and the simulated bonus is “non-stock time”.

  FIG. 78 shows a structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 4). The simulated bonus lottery (during ART) table (4) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “0” and the simulated bonus is “stock time”. FIG. 79 shows a structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 5). The simulated bonus lottery (during ART) table (5) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is "1" and the simulated bonus is "stock time". FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 6). The simulated bonus lottery (during ART) table (6) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is "2" and the simulated bonus is "stock time".

  Note that the structure (internal winning combination type and pseudo bonus winning type) of each of the simulated bonus lottery (during ART) shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 is the simulated bonus lottery shown in FIG. 69 etc. excluding the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is the same as the (normal) table, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(3) Pseudo bonus lottery (in determination screen) table FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (in determination screen) table. The pseudo bonus lottery (in finalization screen) table is used in pseudo bonus lottery processing in the processing during finalization screen (see FIG. 306 described later).

  In addition, since various pseudo bonus winning classifications specified in the pseudo bonus lottery (in finalization screen) table are the same as those of the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 69 and the like, the description of the pseudo bonus winning classifications is omitted. Do. Also, among various internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (during decision screen) table, except for “RB fake”, it is the same as that described in the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. . Note that "RB fake" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "16".

(4) Pseudo bonus lottery (during pseudo bonus end) table FIG. 82 shows a structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (during pseudo bonus end) table. The pseudo bonus lottery (during pseudo bonus end waiting) table is used in the pseudo bonus lottery process in the pseudo bonus end waiting process (see FIG. 313 described later).

  In addition, since various pseudo bonus winning classifications specified in the pseudo bonus lottery (during pseudo bonus end waiting) table are the same as those of the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 69 etc., the description of the pseudo bonus winning classification Is omitted. In addition, among various internal winning combinations defined in the dummy bonus lottery (during dummy bonus end) table, the dummy bonus lottery (normally shown in FIG. 69 etc.) except “don't justify permission” and “middle don justify permission” ) The same as described in the table. "Don match permission" corresponds to the case where the replay player according to "Don match" of the data pointers "20" to "22" is internally won in a state where the don match permission is established. Also, “medium don match permission” corresponds to a case where the replay player according to “medium match” of the data pointer “23” is internally won in a state where the don match permission is established.

(5) Pseudo bonus lottery table (during rocket) FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a configuration of a simulated bonus lottery (during rocket) table. The simulated bonus lottery (during rocket) table is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “3” in the simulated bonus lottery process in the in-rocket process (see FIGS. 302 and 303 described later).

  In addition, the configuration (the internal winning combination type and the pseudo bonus winning type) of the simulated bonus lottery (inside rocket) table shown in FIG. 83 is the simulated bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. Since the configuration is the same as that in FIG.

[XR lottery table]
Next, various XR lottery tables will be described. The XR lottery table is used when performing simulated bonus lottery in various sub game states.

(1) XR lottery (normal) table FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (normal) table. Note that the XR lottery (normal) table is used in the XR lottery process in the below-described normal medium process (see FIG. 286 described later).

  The XR lottery (normal) table defines the correspondence between the XR winning parameter type and the lottery value, which are set for each internal winning combination.

  Note that the XR winning parameter is a parameter for determining the number of ART games to be added per unit game in XR mode and XRC mode games, and the continuation probability of XR mode and XRC mode games. That is, the XR winning parameter is a parameter for determining the game content in the XR mode and the XRC mode. Specifically, the XR winning parameter is used when determining the game content in the XR mode and the XRC mode in the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139 described later).

  In the XR lottery (ordinary) table, XR winning parameters 1 to 6 (preferential release), XR winning parameters 1 to 4 (post release) and non-winning are specified as winning types of XR winning parameters. Note that "preferential release" means that the corresponding XR mode is stocked as a preferred stock.

  The contents of various internal winning combinations defined in the XR lottery (normal) table are similar to those of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the internal winning combination types defined in the XR lottery (normal) table is omitted.

  In addition, although the case where the mode (XR lottery mode) of XR lottery processing is one type is explained here, the present invention is not limited to this, the type of winning XR winning parameter, winning probability (lottery value) A plurality of XR lottery modes may be provided which are different from each other. In this case, an XR lottery table may be provided for each XR lottery mode.

  In the XR lottery process using the XR lottery (normal) table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are added to the XR lottery table. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value for each specified XR winning parameter. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the XR winning opportunity parameter at that time is won.

(2) XR lottery (ART) table With reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, various XR lottery (ART) tables will be described. In addition, the XR lottery (ART) table shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. 86 is used in the XR lottery processing in the processing during ART described later (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later).

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (ART) table (part 1). The XR lottery table (ART) table (1) is referenced in cases other than the XR ceiling game. On the other hand, FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (ART) table (part 2). The XR lottery table (ART) (part 2) is referred to during the XR ceiling game.

  The configuration of each XR lottery table (ART) table (internal winning combination type and winning category of XR winning parameter) is the same as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84 except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table configuration is omitted. In addition, the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (ART) table is also the method of XR lottery processing using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, and "waste" has occurred or not Since the method is the same as the method of determining whether or not the description is omitted.

(3) XR lottery (in ART preparation) table FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in ART preparation) table. The XR lottery (in ART preparation) table is used in the XR lottery process in the below-mentioned ART in-provision process (see FIG. 289 described later).

  The configuration of the XR lottery (during ART preparation) table (internal winning combination type and winning classification of XR winning parameter) is the same as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84 except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since this is a configuration, the description of this table configuration is omitted. In addition, the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (during ART preparation) table is also the technique of XR lottery processing using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, and "earning" occurs Since the method is the same as the method of determining whether or not it is, the description thereof will be omitted.

(4) XR lottery (in determination screen) table FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in determination screen) table. The XR lottery (in determination screen) table is used in the XR lottery process in the below-described process during determination screen (see FIG. 306 described later). Note that the gaming state “in the finalized screen” corresponds to the gaming state in preparation for the simulated bonus.

  The configuration of the XR lottery (in finalization screen) table (internal winning combination type and winning classification of XR winning parameter) is the same as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84 except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since there is, the description of this table configuration is omitted. In addition, the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (in finalization screen) table also applies to the method of XR lottery processing using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (subtraction value is sequentially subtracted, and "earning" occurs Since the method is the same as the method of determining whether or not it is, the description thereof will be omitted.

(5) XR lottery (in BB) table With reference to FIGS. 89 to 97, various XR lottery (in BB) tables will be described. Note that the XR lottery (in BB) table is used in the XR lottery process in the during-BB process (see FIG. 308 described later).

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 1). The XR lottery (in BB) table (1) is referred to when the don match mode is "1". FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 2). The XR lottery (in BB) table (part 2) is referred to when the don match mode is "2". FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 3). The XR lottery (in BB) table (part 3) is referred to when the don match mode is "3". FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 4). The XR lottery (in BB) table (4) is referred to when the don match mode is "4". FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 5). The XR lottery (in BB) table (5) is referred to when the don match mode is "5".

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 6). The XR lottery (in BB) table (6) is referred to when the don match mode is "6". FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 7). The XR lottery (in BB) table (7) is referred to when the don match mode is "7". FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 8). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 8) is referred to when the don match mode is "8". And FIG. 97 is a figure which shows the structure of a XR lottery (in BB) table (the 9). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 9) is referred to when the don match mode is "9".

  In the present embodiment, as described above, nine types of don-justified modes (“1” to “9”) are provided. The value of the don match mode is determined by the below-mentioned BB XR lottery game number table (see FIGS. 106 to 108 described later).

  In the don match mode “1” to “9”, in the display form of 3 × 3 symbols formed in the display window of the liquid crystal display device 11, a predetermined line across the symbol “DON” from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R The type of the aspect (hereinafter referred to as “don't match”) aligned on the top, the occurrence probability (lottery value) of the don match, etc. are different from each other. Then, the value of the don match mode is any of the don match nonpermission flag, the don match permission flag, and the mid don match permission flag in the below-mentioned BB in the don match permission flag lottery table (see FIGS. 111 to 119 described later). Used in making decisions.

  In addition, since winning types of various XR winning parameters defined in the XR lottery (in BB) table are the same as those of the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84, the description of the pseudo bonus winning types is omitted. . In addition, since various internal winning combinations defined in the XR lottery (in BB) table are the same as those in the pseudo bonus lottery (during a pseudo bonus end waiting) table shown in FIG. 82, the description of the internal winning combination is also omitted. .

(6) Table of XR lottery (during standby for pseudo bonus end) FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a configuration of a table of XR lottery (during standby for pseudo bonus end). The XR lottery (during standby for pseudo bonus termination) table is used in the XR lottery process in the processing during standby for pseudo bonus termination described later (see FIG. 313 described later).

  Note that the configuration of the XR lottery (during waiting for pseudo bonus termination) table (internal winning combination type and winning type of XR winning opportunity parameter) is the same as the XR lottery (in BB) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of this table configuration will be omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (during waiting for pseudo bonus termination) table also uses the above-mentioned XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery values are sequentially subtracted and Is the same as in the method of determining whether or not

(7) XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table With reference to FIGS. 99 to 101, various XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) tables will be described. The XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table is a normal medium process (see FIG. 286 described later), an ART in process (described later) (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), and an ART in-process process (described later (described later). 289) and in the processing during rocket described later (see FIGS. 302 and 303 described later), it is used in the XR lottery process (simulated bonus winning) performed when the simulated bonus is won.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table (part 1). The XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (part 1) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “0”. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table (part 2). The XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (part 2) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “1”. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table (part 3). The XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (part 3) is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode is “2”.

  The XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table defines the correspondence between the XR winning opportunity parameter type and the lottery value, which are set for each winning pseudo bonus type.

  The type “RB” of the simulated bonus defined in the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table includes the RB winning (early release) and the RB winning (after release) defined in the simulated bonus lottery table. In addition, in the type “BB” of the simulated bonus defined in the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table, red 7 BB winning (early release), red 7 BB winning (post released), don specified in the simulated bonus lottery table. Included are BB winning (pre-release), Don BB winning (post-release) and Don BB winning (immediate release).

  Also, for the type “XBB1” of the simulated bonus defined in the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table, the XBB1 winning (early releasing), XBB1 winning (lear releasing), and XBB1 winning (defined in the simulated bonus lottery table) Immediate release). Furthermore, the type “XBB2” of the pseudo bonus includes the XBB2 winning (immediate release) defined in the pseudo bonus lottery table.

  The types of XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the types of XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table will be omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (simulation bonus winning) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery values are sequentially subtracted, and Since the method is the same as the method of determining whether or not it has occurred, the description thereof is omitted.

(8) XR lottery (when NRB in progress game achieved) table FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (when NRB in progress game is completed) table. The XR lottery (when NRB middle defined game is achieved) table is used in the XR lottery processing performed when the number of staying games in the NRB mode reaches the standard game in NRB middle processing (see FIG. 310 described later). Note that this prescribed game count is the number of staying games when the RB in XR lottery mode becomes “10” determined in the NRB in XR lottery game count table (see FIG. 109 described later) (in RB described later) It corresponds to the value of the XR lottery game number counter).

  The XR lottery (when NRB middle definition game is achieved) table defines the correspondence between the type of XR winning parameter and its lottery value.

  The types of XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when NRB middle defined game achievement) table is the same as that of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when NRB in progress game achieved) table is omitted. In addition, the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (when the specified game is achieved during NRB) table is also the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery values are sequentially subtracted This method is the same as the method of determining whether or not "" has occurred, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

(9) XR lottery (at SRB middle defined game achievement) table FIG. 103 is a view showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when SRB middle definition game achievement) table. The XR lottery (when the SRB in-game defined game is achieved) table is used in an XR lottery process performed when the number of staying games in the SRB mode reaches the defined game in the later-described process in SRB (see FIG. 311 described later). Note that this prescribed game number is the number of staying games when the RB in XR lottery mode becomes “7” determined in the SRB in XR lottery game number table (see FIG. 110 described later) (in RB described later) It corresponds to the value of the XR lottery game number counter).

  The XR lottery (when the SRB middle defined game is achieved) table defines the correspondence between the type of XR winning parameter and its lottery value.

  The types of XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (at SRB middle defined game achievement) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when the defined game achieved during SRB) table is omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the specified game is achieved during SRB) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery values are sequentially subtracted. This method is the same as the method of determining whether or not "" has occurred, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

(10) XR lottery (at XBB continuation) table FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (at XBB continuation) table. The XR lottery (when XBB continues) table is used in the XR lottery process which is performed when the continuation of the XBB mode is determined in the later-described XBB in-process (see FIG. 312 described later).

  The XR lottery (when XBB continues) table defines the correspondence between the types of XR winning parameter and their lottery values, which are set for each type of the XBB continuous lottery winning flag. In this embodiment, two types of XBB continuous lottery winning flag (“1” and “2”) are provided. The XBB continuation lottery winning flags “1” and “2” respectively correspond to continuation parameters 1 and 2 defined in the XBB continuation lottery table (see FIG. 120 described later).

  The types of XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table is the same as that of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table is omitted. Moreover, the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table also uses the method of XR lottery processing using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, and "earning" occurs. Since the method is the same as the method of determining whether or not it is, the description thereof will be omitted.

(11) XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table. The XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the BG challenge is successful (correct) in the BGZ process (at the time of winning) described later (see FIG. 305 described later).

  The XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table defines the correspondence between the XR winning parameter type and its lottery value, which are set for each type of success parameter.

  In the present embodiment, two types of success parameters (“1” and “2”) are provided. Among the contents of various correct answers defined in the BG challenge content lottery table (see FIGS. 180 and 181 described later) for the success parameter “2”, “both correct answer 1: correct answer 1 when not selected” is determined. If you When the BG challenge succeeds with the contents of various other correct answers, “1” is set in the success parameter.

  The type of XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is the same as that of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning parameter defined in the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is omitted. In addition, the XR lottery process method using the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is also the XR lottery process method using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, and Since the method is the same as the method of determining whether or not it has occurred, the description thereof is omitted.

[Number table of XR lottery games in BB]
Next, the number table of XR lottery games in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. In the BB XR lottery game number table, in the BB middle process (see FIG. 308 described later), the don match mode (1 to 9) is set based on the value of the BB remaining game number counter and the don match mode map number. Used in making decisions.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-XR lottery game number table during BB (part 1). In the BB in XR lottery game number table (part 1) shown in FIG. 106, the values of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), don match mode map numbers (1 to 43), and match values of don match mode The correspondence relationship of is defined.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-XR lottery game number table during BB (part 2). In the BB middle XR lottery game number table (part 2) shown in FIG. 107, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don match mode map number (44 to 86), and the don match mode values The correspondence relationship of is defined.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-XR lottery game number table during BB (part 3). In the BB XR lottery game number table (part 3) shown in FIG. 108, the values of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), don match mode map numbers (87 to 129), and match values of don match mode The correspondence relationship of is defined.

  The number of games (1 to 60 games) described in the leftmost column of the BB XR lottery game number table is the value of the BB remaining game number counter, and the numerical values (1 to 129) described in the uppermost row are It is a don match mode map number. Then, the values (1 to 9) described in the other columns in the BB XR lottery game number table become values of the don match mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the BB remaining game number counter is 50 and the don match mode map number is 15, the don match mode “3” is determined (set).

[Number table of XR lottery games in NRB]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the structure of the NRB-in-XR lottery game number table. The NRB during XR lottery game number table is based on the value of the RB during XR lottery game number counter and the RB during XR lottery table mode in the NRB during processing (see FIG. 310 described later). It is used when determining (0 to 10).

  The table of number of XR lottery games for NRB includes the value of the number-of-games counter for RB during RB (1 to 60 games), the value of XR lottery table mode for RB (1 to 26), and the value of XR lottery mode for RB (0 to Define the correspondence with 10).

  The number of games (1 to 60 games) described in the leftmost column of the NRB during XR lottery game count table is the value of the game counter for XR lottery among RB, and the numerical value described in the column of the top row is during RB. It is a value (1 to 26) of the XR lottery table mode. Then, the values (0 to 10) described in the other columns in the NRB-in-XR lottery game number table become the values in the RB-XR lottery mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the RB XR lottery game number counter is 30 and the RB XR lottery table mode is 15, then the RB XR lottery mode “10” is determined (set).

[Number table of XR lottery games in SRB]
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the configuration of the SRB-in-XR lottery game number table. The SRB during XR lottery game number table is based on the value of the RB during XR lottery game number counter and the RB during XR lottery table mode in the SRB during processing (see FIG. 311 described later), the RB during XR lottery mode. It is used when determining (0 to 7).

  The SRB middle XR lottery game number table includes the value of the RB middle XR lottery game number counter (1 to 60 games), the RB XR lottery table mode (1 to 28), and the RB XR lottery mode values (0 to Define the correspondence with 7). The RB middle XR lottery table mode (1 to 28) corresponds to the ART lottery game number table number (1 to 28) defined in the ART lottery game number table lottery table at the start of SRB in FIG. 132 described later.

  The number of games (1 to 60 games) described in the leftmost column of the SRB middle XR lottery game number table is the value of the RB middle XR lottery number-of-games counter. It is a value (1 to 28) of the XR lottery table mode. Then, the values (0 to 7) described in the other columns in the SRB in-XR lottery game number table become the values in the RB in XR lottery mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the RB XR lottery game number counter is 30 and the RB XR lottery table mode is 15, then the RB XR lottery mode “1” is determined (set).

[BB during Don match permission flag table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111 to FIG. 119, the during-BB don match permission flag table will be described. During the BB match processing (see FIG. 308 described later), the don match permission flag table for BB is used to determine the don match permission (medium don match permission) flag or the disallow flag in the don match permission lottery process. Used. Note that, in the present embodiment, a don match permission flag table in BB is separately provided for each don match mode.

  FIGS. 111 to 119 show the configuration of the don match permission flag table in BB in the case where the current don match modes are 1 to 9, respectively.

  The BB during match flag setting flag is set for each type of "don match player" who won the internal winning combination of "don match not permitted", "don match permit" and "medium don match permission", and its winning type Define the correspondence with the lottery value.

  In the don match permission flag lottery process using the BB match permission flag table, first, random value values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are In BB, the match value for each winning type specified in the don match permission flag table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, if the current don match mode is “2” and the internal winning match is “upper match”, “don match disapproval” is determined with a probability of 31088/32768, and 1680/32768 "Don't match permission" is determined by the probability of

[XBB continuous lottery table]
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XBB continuous lottery table. The XBB continuous lottery table is used to determine the winning or non-winning of the continuation of the XBB mode in the XBB continuous lottery process in the below-described XBB in-process (see FIG. 312 described later).

  The XBB continuous lottery table defines the correspondence between the types of winning and non-winning of continuation of the XBB mode and the lottery values set for each internal winning combination.

  If the winning type “continuation parameter 1” or “continuation parameter 2” defined in the XBB continuation lottery table is determined, it means that the continuation of the XBB mode has been won.

  In addition, the contents of the internal winning combination defined in the XBB continuous lottery table are as follows. "Donfake lower" is a replay role played internally with the data pointer "17". The “Donfake upper row” is a replay role played internally with the data pointer “18”. The "don't fight" is a replay role played internally at the data pointer "19".

  Also, “Don't match lower” is a replay role played internally for the data pointer “20”. “Dong justified upper row” is a replay role played internally with the data pointer “21”. "Don Fake Diagonal" is a replay role played internally on the data pointer "22". The "don't match middle row" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "23".

  In the XBB continuous lottery processing using the XBB continuous lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) in the XBB continuous lottery table The lottery value for each winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is "Don match lower", "continuation parameter 1" is won with a probability of 16384/32768, and continuation of the XBB mode is determined.

[XBB continuous XBB stock table]
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XBB continuation time XBB stock table. The XBB continuation time XBB stock table is used in determining whether the XBB mode stock wins or not in the XBB continuation time XBB stock lottery process in the below-described XBB in-treatment (see FIG. 312 described later).

  The XBB continuation time XBB stock table defines the correspondence between the winning / not winning types of stock in the XBB mode set for each type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuous lottery winning flag, and the lottery value thereof. The XBB continuation lottery winning flags 1 and 2 correspond to the continuation parameters 1 and 2 defined in the XBB continuation lottery table of FIG. 120, respectively.

  In the XBB continuous XBB stock lottery process using the XBB continuous XBB stock table, first, random number values extracted from a range of predetermined numerical values (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are At XBB continuation XBB stock table is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value for each winning type. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, when XBB continuous lottery winning flag 1 is set, the stock in XBB mode is not won with 100% probability, and when XBB continuous lottery winning flag 2 is set, 100% probability In XBB mode stock wins.

[Continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB]
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the configuration of a continuous stock lottery (normal) table in XBB. The XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table determines the number of XBB mode stocks (including non winnings) in the XBB continuous stock lottery process (normal) during the XBB process (see FIG. 312 described later). Used in

  XBB continuation XBB stock table is the correspondence of various stock number (0 (not winning), 1, 2, 3 and 5) of XBB mode and its lottery value set for each internal winning combination Define the relationship. The type of internal winning combination defined in the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table is omitted.

  In XBB continuous stock lottery processing (normal) using the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each stock number in the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the stock number at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", one stock is won with a probability of 21782/32768, two stocks with a probability of 10922/32768, and three stocks with a probability of 64/32768. Do.

[NRB during navi addition lottery table]
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the configuration of the NRB-in-Navi-addition lottery table. The NRB in-navi-n-per-place selection lottery table is used to determine the number of ber-navis additions (including non-winning) in the NRB in-nell number-of-numbers lottery process during NRB in-process (see FIG. 310 described below).

  The NRB in-Navi-over-navigation lottery table is set for each type of internal winning combination, the type of the number of bell navigation additions (0 (not winning), 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, and 20) and its lottery value Define the correspondence relationship with Note that the type of the internal winning combination defined in the NRB in-Navi over-lottery table is the same as that of the above-mentioned XR lottery (in-BB) table. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the NRB in-navi addition lottery table will be omitted.

  In NRB during the NRB, using the NRB during the navigation in the NRB, the number of times of the bell navigation is added. First, the random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random denominator = 32768) is During NRB during the NRB, the number of additions and the number of lottery processing are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each number of additions. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the number of additions at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", it wins 2 Bernavi additions with a probability of 28672/32768, wins 3 Bernavi additions with a probability of 3968/32768, and 96/32768 Win a chance to win 5 Bellnavi additions and win a chance to win 10 Bellnavi additions with a 32/32768 chance.

[NRB forced shortening lottery table]
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the configuration of the NRB forced shortening lottery table. The NRB forced shortening lottery table is used to determine the winning / not winning of forced shortening of the prescribed game number in the NRB prescribed game number forced shift lottery process in the NRB processing (see FIG. 310 described later). .

  The NRB forced shortening lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning or not winning) of forced shortening of the prescribed number of games and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination. The type of the internal winning combination defined in the NRB forced shortening lottery table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the NRB forced shortening lottery table will be omitted.

  In the NRB prescribed number-of-games forced transfer lottery process using the NRB forced shortening lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) The NRB forced shortening lottery table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is "strong ice", the forced reduction of the prescribed game number is not won with a probability of 32764/32768, and the forced reduction of the prescribed game number is won with a probability of 4/32768.

[Number of SRB games plus lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125 to FIG. 131, the number-of-games-plus-lottery table will be described during various SRBs. The SRB in-game number-plus-game lottery table is used to determine the number of ART games in addition (including non-winning games) in the ART game-number-plus lottery processing during SRB in-process (see FIG. 311 described later). .

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-SRB-games-plus-lottery table (part 1) that is referred to when the RB-in-XR lottery mode is 1. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-SRB-games-plus-lottery table (part 2) that is referred to when the RB-in-RX lottery mode is two. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-SRB-games-plus-lottery table (part 3) that is referred to when the RB-in-RX lottery mode is three. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-SRB-games-plus-lottery table (4) that is referred to when the RB-in-XR lottery mode is four. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-SRB-games-plus-lottery table (part 5) that is referred to when the RB-in-RX lottery mode is five. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number-of-SRB-games-plus-lottery table (Sixth) to be referred to in the case where the RB-based XR lottery mode is six. And, FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the configuration of the SRB in-game number-plus-game lottery table (7) referred to when the RB in XR lottery mode is 7.

  Number of games added to SRB The lottery table is set to the number of ART games added (0 (not winning), 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50) set for each type of internal winning combination. , 100, 200, 300) and their corresponding values. The type of the internal winning combination defined in the SRB in-game number-plus-lottery table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the SRB in-game number addition lottery table is omitted here.

  In the ART game number addition lottery process using the SRB in-game number addition lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are SRB During the number-of-games addition lottery table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each additional number. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the number of additions at that time is won.

  For example, if the RB XR lottery mode is 1 in RB and the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, ART is won for 20 games with a probability of 31744/32768 and 30 with a probability of 768/32768. Wins ART addition of games, wins ART addition of 50 games with a probability of 224/32768, wins ART addition of 100 games with a probability of 32/32768.

[Art lottery game number table random selection table at SRB start]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery game number table random selection table at SRB start time. At the start of SRB ART lottery game number table lottery table is at the time of NRB processing described later (see FIG. 310 described later) and the SRB starting process number table lottery processing at an SRB in progress processing described later (see FIG. 311 described later). , Is used when determining the table number.

  The SRB start time ART lottery game number table lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of table number (1 to 28) and the lottery value set for each type of the transition history to the SRB mode. The table numbers (1 to 28) correspond to the RB to XR lottery table modes (1 to 28) defined in the XR lottery game number table in SRB of FIG.

  In the SRB start time ART lottery game number table lottery process using the SRB start time ART lottery game number table lottery table, first, a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, 0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768) The extracted random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each table number in the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the table number at that time is won.

  For example, if the history of transition to the SRB mode is “transition from NRB”, table number 1 or 2 will be won with a probability of 8192/32768 and table number 3 or 4 will be won with a probability of 3200/32768, The table number 5 or 6 is won with a probability of 2048/32768, and the table number 7 or 8 is won with a probability of 1024/32768. Also, in this case, one of the table numbers 9 to 12 wins with a probability of 512/32768, and one of the table numbers 13 to 16 wins with a probability of 256/32768, and the table number 17 with a probability of 128/32768. Any one of to 20 is won, and any of the table numbers 21 to 24 is won with a probability of 64 / 32,768.

[Simulated bonus lottery mode transition table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, various pseudo bonus lottery mode transition tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table is a normal medium process described later (see FIG. 286 described later), an ART preparing process described later (see FIG. 289 described later), and an ART intermediate process described later (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). , Determine the board lottery mode of the transfer destination in the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition processing during each processing of XR processing described later (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later) and XRC processing described later (see FIG. 301 described later) Used when

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (part 1) that is referred to when the current pseudo bonus lottery mode is 0. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a configuration of a simulated bonus lottery mode transition table (part 2) that is referred to when the current simulated bonus lottery mode is 1. And FIG. 135 is a figure which shows the structure of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 3) referred when the present pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode is two.

  The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table defines the correspondence between the type (0, 1 and 2) of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination. The type of internal winning combination defined in the simulated bonus lottery mode transition table is the same as that of the various simulated bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table will be omitted.

  In the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process using the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are simulated. The bonus lottery mode transition table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the type of pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination at that time is won.

  For example, if the current simulated bonus lottery mode is 0 and the internal winning combination is "push bell", the transition to simulated bonus lottery mode 0 (without transition) is won with a probability of 32438/32768, Win a transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 1 with a probability of 328/32768, and win a transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 2 with a probability of 2/32768.

[Simulation bonus lottery mode transition (simulation bonus end) table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, various pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (during pseudo bonus end) tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (during pseudo bonus end) table determines the board lottery mode of transfer destination in the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition processing in the later-described pseudo bonus end processing (at the time of winning) processing (see FIG. 314 described later). Used when

  FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (during pseudo bonus end) table (part 1), which is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode at the end of the pseudo bonus is 0. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the configuration of a simulated bonus lottery mode transition (simulated bonus ended) table (part 2) that is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode at the end of the simulated bonus is 1. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of a simulated bonus lottery mode transition (simulated bonus ended) table (part 3) that is referred to when the simulated bonus lottery mode at the end of the simulated bonus is 2.

  The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (at the time of pseudo bonus end) table is the type (0, 1 and 2) of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination which is set for each pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end) Define the correspondence with the lottery value.

  In the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process using the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (simulated bonus end) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination in each pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (during pseudo bonus end) table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the type of pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination at that time is won.

  For example, if the current simulated bonus lottery mode is 0 and the simulated bonus end type is "BB ended", the transition to the simulated bonus lottery mode 0 (without transition) is won with a probability of 16384/32768, Win a transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 1 with a probability of 16302/32768, and win a transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 2 with a probability of 82/32768.

[XR content lottery table]
FIG. 139 shows a structure of an XR content lottery table. The XR content lottery table includes NRB processing (see FIG. 310 described later), SRB processing described later (see FIG. 311 described later), XBB processing described later (see FIG. 312 described later) and BGZ described later (see FIG. At the time of winning) In the XR content lottery process during each process (refer to FIG. 305 described later), determine the contents of the game played in the XR mode (the number of basic ART ART game and the XR continuation rate added for each continuation) It is used when making a tentative decision.

  The XR content lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of XR mode game content (including non-winning) and the lottery value set for each type of XR winning parameter (1 to 6). Parameters 1 to 6 defined in the XR content lottery table correspond to XR winning parameters 1 to 6, respectively.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139, 12 types of XR mode game contents are provided. Specifically, as game contents in the XR mode, a mode in which the number of ART basic games (hereinafter referred to as the number of XR basic games) added for each continuation is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 50%, XR basic The game has 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 60%, the XR basic game has 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 70%, the XR basic game has 5 games and the XR continuation There is a mode in which the rate is 80%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 and a mode in which the XR continuation rate is 90%, and a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 95% Provided.

  Furthermore, as game contents in XR mode, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 50%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 60%, XR A mode in which the number of basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 70%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 80%, the number of XR basic games is 10 and XR A mode in which the continuation rate is 90% and a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 95% are provided.

  In the XR content lottery process using the XR content lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) in the XR content lottery table The lottery value for each game content in XR mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" has occurred), the game content of the XR mode at that time is won.

  For example, when the XR winning opportunity parameter is “1”, it wins a mode with 25600/32768, where the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 50%. Win a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 60%, or the mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 70%. Also, in this case, with a probability of 960 / 32,768, the XR basic game count is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 80%, and the XR basic game count is 5 with a probability of 32 / 32,768. A mode with an XR continuation rate of 90% or an XR base game with 5 games and an XR continuation rate of 95% is achieved.

[XR basic G number lottery table]
Next, various XR basic G number random determination tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. The XR basic G number lottery table redetermines the number of XR basic games based on the internal winning combination in the XR basic G number lottery process in the below-mentioned XR in-process (see FIG. 297 to FIG. 299 described later) ) Is used.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR basic G number random determination table (part 1) that is referred to when the initial XR basic game count is five. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR basic G number random determination table (part 2) that is referred to when the initial number of XR basic games is 10.

  The “initial XR basic game number” is the XR basic game number (5 or 10) determined by the XR content lottery processing using the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. Further, in the XR basic G number lottery process using the XR basic G number lottery table, although the number of XR basic games is changed, the XR continuation rate is not changed.

  The XR basic G number lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR basic game number after change (5, 10, 20 and 30) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value thereof. The type of internal winning combination defined in the XR basic G number lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR basic G number lottery table will be omitted.

  In the XR basic G number lottery process using the XR basic G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are XR In the basic G number lottery table, the lottery values for each type of XR basic game number are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the number of XR basic games at that time is won.

  For example, if the initial number of XR basic games is 5 and the internal winning combination is "push bell", the probability of 32416/32768 wins the number of XR basic games of 5 games (no change), 320 / It wins 10 XR base games with a probability of 32768 and wins XR base games with 20 games or 30 games with a probability of 16/32768.

[XR additional addition table]
FIG. 142 shows the structure of the XR addition overlay table. The XR addition addition table is used to determine the number of ART-added games based on the internal winning combination in the X-G in-X addition addition lottery process in XR processing (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). Be

  The XR addition addition table has the types of addition games (0 (no addition), 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300 and 333) set for each internal winning combination and , And define the correspondence with the lottery value. The type of the internal winning combination defined in the XR additional addition table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR addition and addition table is omitted.

  In the XR addition G number addition addition lottery process using the XR addition addition table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) In the additional addition table, the lottery value for each type of the number of added games is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative (a "marginal" occurs), the number of added games at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is "push bell", it wins without the number of added games with a probability of 32764/32768, wins with the number of added games of 100 with a probability of 2/32768, 1/32768 Win 200 games or 300 games on top with a probability of.

[Combo bonus lottery table]
FIG. 143 shows a configuration of a combo bonus lottery table. The combo bonus lottery table is used to determine the number of ART games to be added by the combo bonus in the combo-time additional G number lottery process in XR processing (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later) described later.

  The combo bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of added games (0 (no additional), 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 and 100) and the lottery value set for each specific combo number. Do. The “specific combo number” is the number of combos that triggers the occurrence of a combo bonus, and in the present embodiment, the type of the specific combo number is 5 combos, 7 combos, 10 combos, 15 combos, 20 combos, 25 Set 7 types of combo and 30 combos.

  In the combo upon-addition G number lottery process using the combo bonus lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are displayed as combo bonus In the lottery table, the lottery value is sequentially subtracted by the type of the additional game number. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative (a "marginal" occurs), the number of added games at that time is won.

  For example, when the combo number reaches 20 combos and a combo bonus occurs, the player wins 20 games on a probability of 30720/32768, wins 30 games on a probability of 1920/32768, and a probability of 64/32768 Win 50 games or 100 games on top.

[XR continuous lottery table]
Next, various XR continuous lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The XR continuous lottery table is used to determine the winning or non-winning of the continuation of the XR mode in the XR continuous lottery processing in the processing during XR described later (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later).

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR continuous lottery table (part 1) that is referred to when the XR continuous mode is 1; FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuous lottery table (part 2) that is referred to when the XR continuous mode is 2. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuous lottery table (3) to be referred to when the XR continuous mode is 3; FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuous lottery table (part 4) that is referred to when the XR continuous mode is 4. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR continuous lottery table (part 5) that is referred to when the XR continuous mode is 5; FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuous lottery table (part 6) that is referred to when the XR continuous mode is six. And FIG. 150 is a figure which shows the structure of the XR continuation lottery table (the 7) referred when the non-continuation flag of XR is set.

  In addition, XR continuation modes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 are respectively XR continuation rates 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90 described in the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. Corresponds to%, 95% mode.

  The XR continuous lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning classification (success or non-winning) of continuation of the XR mode set for each internal winning combination (other than the rare combination or the combination) and the lottery value thereof.

  In the XR continuous lottery processing using the XR continuous lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) in the XR continuous lottery table The lottery value for each winning classification of XR continuation is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, if the XR continuation mode is 2 and the internal winning combination is "other than the rare character", XR continuation is won with a probability of 19162/32768, the XR continuation mode is 2 and the internal winning combination is " In the case of "rare", XR continuation wins with 100% probability. As is clear from this, when the XR continuation mode is 2 (corresponding to the 60% XR continuation mode), the probability of winning the XR continuation is not uniformly 60% regardless of the internal winning combination, It changes according to the type of internal winning combination. Therefore, the XR continuation rate described in the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. 139 is the difference in winning probability of XR continuation according to the type of the internal winning combination, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (ra), etc. It is the average XR continuity probability calculated taking into consideration.

[XR ceiling mode transition lottery table]
Next, various XR ceiling mode transition lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. The XR ceiling mode transition lottery table is an NRB in-process process (see FIG. 310 described later), an SRB in-process process (described later in FIG. 311), an XBB in-process process (refer to FIG. 312 described below), an ART described later During XR ceiling mode transition lottery processing during middle processing (refer to later-described FIGS. 291 to 293) and later-described BGZ (when winning) processing (refer to later-described FIG. 305), XR ceiling mode to be transition destination is determined Used when

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (part 1) that is referred to when the XR mode is won in a game other than the XR ceiling game. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (part 2) that is referred to when the XR mode is won in the XR ceiling game.

  The XR ceiling mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the transition destination XR ceiling mode type set for each current XR ceiling mode type and the lottery value thereof. In the present embodiment, eight types of XR ceiling modes 0 to 7 are provided as the XR ceiling modes. Between the XR ceiling modes 0 to 7, the types of winning and the various winning contents (XR ceiling basic game number and addition value table type) defined in the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table described later with reference to FIG. 153 Winning probabilities are different from each other.

  In the XR ceiling mode transition lottery processing using the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) The ceiling mode transition lottery table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of XR ceiling mode of the transition destination. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the type of the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination at that time is won.

  For example, if the XR mode wins in a game other than the ceiling game in the XR mode and the current XR ceiling mode is 0, the transition to the XR ceiling mode 1 is won with a probability of 4096/32768, 12288 Win a transition to XR ceiling mode 2 with a probability of / 32768, win a transition to XR ceiling mode 3 with a probability of 14336/32768, and win a transition to XR ceiling mode 4 with a probability of 2048/32768.

[XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table]
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table. The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table is used to determine the number of XR ceiling basic games and the addition value table type in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 during the below-described ART in-progress process (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). Used.

  The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table defines the correspondence between the types of various winning contents (XR ceiling basic game number and addition value table types) set for each type of XR ceiling mode and the lottery value thereof. In this embodiment, the types of the number of XR ceiling basic games are 15 types of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400 and 500 games. Provide Also, as the addition value table type, two types of addition value table 1 and addition value table 2 are provided. This additional value table type is used when determining the additional value of the XR overhead game number using the XR overhead game number lottery 2 table described in FIG. 154 described later.

  In the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 using the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of winning content. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), it means that the type of the winning content at that time is won.

  For example, when the XR ceiling mode is “2”, any of “Ceiling base game number 10, addition value table 1” to “Ceiling base game number 90, addition value table 1” with a probability of 64/32768. Wins and any of “Ceiling base game number 100, addition value table 2” to “Ceiling base game number 400, addition value table 2” wins with a probability of 3072/32768, with a probability of 19840/32768, The winning contents of "The number of ceiling basic games 500, the additional value table 2" are won.

[XR ceiling game number lottery 2 tables]
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table. The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table is used when determining the addition value of the XR ceiling game number in the XR ceiling game number lottery processing 2 in the below-described ART in-progress process (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later).

  The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table defines the correspondence between the types of various addition values (additional game numbers) set for each addition value table type and the lottery values. In the present embodiment, the addition value (additional game number) is one of 1 to 100 games.

  In the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 using the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of addition value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the added value at that time is won.

  For example, when the addition value table type is the addition value table 1, the addition value 1 is won with a probability of 3284/32768, and any one of the addition values 2 to 10 is obtained with a probability of 3276/32768.

[XR Carnival Direct Migration Lottery (during ART) Table]
FIG. 155 shows a configuration of an XR carnival direct transition lottery (during ART) table. The XR Carnival Direct Migration lottery (during ART) table is referred to as a "carnival direct migration lip" in the XR Carnival Direct Migration lottery processing (during ART) during in-ART processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). Used when determining winning or non-winning of XR Carnival Direct Transition based on the internal winning combination, if the winning combination is internal winning.

  In addition, when a replay role called "carnival direct transition lip" is internally won, it is in the case of winning the winning number "1" (F_normal ripple) and winning the lock number 4 or 5 in the RT4 gaming state. Corresponds to

  The XR Carnival Direct Migration Lottery (during ART) table defines the correspondence between winning and non winning types of XR Carnival Direct Migration and their lottery values.

  In the XR Carnival direct transition lottery processing (in ART) using the XR Carnival direct transition lottery (in ART) table, first, from a range of predetermined numerical values (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, a random number denominator = 32768) The extracted random value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning classification (winning or non-winning) of XR carnival direct migration in the XR carnival direct migration lottery table (during ART). Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155, when a replay player called “carnival direct transition lip” wins the inside, the XR carnival direct transition is not won with a probability of 10923/32768, and 21845/32768. XR carnival direct transition wins with a probability of.

[XR Carnival Direct Migration Lottery (in XR) Table]
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR carnival direct transition lottery (in XR) table. The XR Carnival Direct Migration Lottery (in XR) table is based on the presence or absence of a reservation in XRC mode in the XR Carnival Direct Migration lottery processing (in XR) during processing described later and in XR (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). , XR Carnival is used to determine the direct transition winning or not.

  In addition, the case where there is a reservation in the XRC mode mentioned here means the case where the XRC mode is stocked, and more specifically, the XR Carnival transition lottery (during XR) table shown in FIG. 157 described later is used. In the XR Carnival transition lottery process (during XR), it corresponds to the case of winning the transition to the XRC mode.

  The XR Carnival Direct Migration Lottery (in XR) table defines the correspondence between the XR Carnival Direct Migration winning / not winning categories and their lottery values set for each of XR Carnival with and without reservations.

  In the XR carnival direct transition lottery process (XR during) using the XR carnival direct migration lottery (in XR) table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random denominator = 32768) The extracted random number value is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value for each winning classification (winning or not winning) of XR carnival direct migration in the XR carnival direct migration lottery (in XR) table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, in the case of “with carnival reservation”, the XR carnival direct transition is won with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, in the case of “no carnival reservation”, the XR carnival direct transition is not won with a probability of 8192/32768 and the XR carnival direct transition is won with a probability of 24576/32768.

[XR Carnival transition lottery (in XR) table]
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table. The XR Carnival transition lottery (in XR) table is switched to the XRC mode based on the internal winning combination in the XR Carnival transition lottery processing (in XR) during the later processing of XR (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). It is used to determine the success or failure of transition.

  The XR Carnival Transition Lottery table (during XR) defines the correspondence between the winning classifications (winning and not winning) of XR Carnival Transition and their lottery values, which are set for each internal winning combination. The types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR Carnival Transition Lottery (in XR) table are the same as those of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR Carnival transition lottery (in XR) table will be omitted.

  In the XR Carnival transition lottery processing (XR) using the XR Carnival transition lottery (in XR) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random denominator = 32768) The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type in the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", it will not win the XR Carnival transition with a probability of 29488/32768 and win the XR Carnival transition with a probability of 3280/32768.

[XR Carnival additional addition 1 lottery table]
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table. The XR Carnival Addition Added 1 lottery table is used to determine the number of ART added additional games based on the number of locks in the XR Carnival Added G number lottery 1 processing during XRC in-process (see FIG. 301 described later). Used.

  The XR carnival additional top 1 lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the number of additional games and the lottery value set for each type of lock count.

  In the present embodiment, ten types of “0” to “9” are provided as the type of lock count. As described above, the number of times of locking is a value calculated based on the remaining number of times of lottery (continuous lock number) defined in the lottery table during the continuous lock state shown in FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, there are 11 types of 0 (no additional), 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90, 105, 120, 135 and 150 games as the type of additional added game number of ART based on the number of locks. Provide a type.

  In the XR carnival middle added G number lottery 1 process using the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table, first, randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) A numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of the number of added games in the XR Carnival additional added 1 lottery table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), it means that the type of the winning content at that time is won.

  For example, if the number of locks is “2”, it will win an additional bonus of 30 games with a probability of 100%.

  The number of additional added games specified in the XR Carnival Additional Added 1 lottery table is the total number of ART games added for each stop trigger of the reel. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing the number of additional added games by 3 is the number of games notified by the reel action at the start of the game, and also the number of added games notified and added each time the reel is stopped.

[XR Carnival additional addition 2 lottery table]
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table. The XR Carnival Addition Added 2 lottery table is used to determine the number of ART added additional games based on the internal winning combination in the XR Carnival Added G number lottery 2 processing during XRC in-process (see FIG. 301 described later). Used for

  The XR Carnival additional top 2 lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the number of additional games and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination.

  The type of internal winning combination defined in the XR Carnival additional addition 2 lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR Carnival additional addition 2 lottery table will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, 12 types of 0 (no addition), 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300, and 333 games are provided as the classification of the additional addition game number of ART. .

  In the XR carnival middle added G number lottery 2 process using the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table, first, randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of the number of added games in the XR Carnival additional added 2 lottery table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), it means that the type of the winning content at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", it will win an additional 50 games with a probability of 26624/32768 and win an additional bonus of 100 games with a probability of 4096/32768, 2048/32768 Win an additional 200 games by chance.

  The number of additional added games specified in the XR Carnival Additional Added 2 lottery table is the number of ART added games notified and added after the third stop. Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown, the contents of effects when each reel is stopped and the contents of effect when the third is stopped (when each reel is stopped) based on the number of additional games determined by the XR carnival addition additional 2 lottery table. The combination effect of the content of the effect of) is determined.

[Rocket mode transition lottery table]
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the configuration of a rocket mode transition lottery table. The rocket mode transition lottery table determines the winning / not winning of transition to the rocket mode based on the internal winning combination in rocket mode transition lottery processing during in-ART processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). Used when

  The rocket mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of winning or not winning transition to the rocket mode and the lottery value, which is set for each internal winning combination. The type of internal winning combination defined in the rocket mode transition lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the rocket mode transition lottery table will be omitted.

  In the rocket mode transition lottery process using the rocket mode transition lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are transferred to the rocket mode In the lottery table, a lottery value is sequentially subtracted for each winning classification (winning or not winning) of transition to the rocket mode. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, when the part related to “out 2” in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) is internally won, the transition to the rocket mode is at a probability of 8192/32768. It will be a win. That is, in the present embodiment, the internal winning combination associated with the "losing 2" in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) is treated as a rare combination.

[Rocket mode continuous lottery table]
FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the configuration of the rocket mode continuous lottery table. In the rocket mode transition lottery table, in rocket mode continuous lottery processing during in-rocket processing described later (see FIG. 302 and FIG. 303 described later), rocket mode continuation / termination based on stock status of pseudo bonus in rocket mode. Is used to determine the In addition, as a stock situation of the simulated bonus, three types of "no stock", "stocked" and "stock winning G" (winning game of simulated bonus stock) are provided.

  The rocket mode continuous lottery table defines the correspondence between rocket type continuation / termination types and their lottery values, which are set for each stock status of the pseudo bonus.

  In the rocket mode continuous lottery process using the rocket mode continuous lottery table, first, random mode values extracted from a range of predetermined numerical values (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are continued to the rocket mode In the lottery table, lottery values for each type of continuation and termination of the rocket mode are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurred), the winning classification at that time is won.

  For example, when the stock status of the simulated bonus in the rocket mode is "no stock", the continuation of the rocket mode is won with a probability of 100%. Also, for example, when the stock status of the simulated bonus in the rocket mode is "with stock", the termination of the rocket mode is won with the probability of 32604/32768, and the continuation of the rocket mode is won with the probability of 164/32768. Do.

[ART end loop lottery table]
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the structure of a loop lottery table at the end of ART. The ART termination loop lottery table is used to determine the return type (including ART termination) after ART termination in the ART termination loop lottery processing in the below-mentioned ART-in-progress process (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). Used.

  The ART termination loop lottery table defines the correspondence between the ART return type (including the ART termination) after ART termination and the lottery value thereof. In this embodiment, as the ART return type, "end" (does not return to ART), "immediate return" (return to ART state in the next game after ART end), "navi return" (after ART end) When navigation is executed, four types of "return to ART state" and "precursor return" (return to ART state precursor game) are provided.

  In the ART termination loop lottery processing using the ART termination loop lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are ART At the end time, in the loop lottery table, subtraction is sequentially performed by the lottery value for each ART recovery type. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the ART return type at that time is won.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162, it wins the ART return type "end" with a probability of 27848/32768, wins the ART return type "instant return" with a probability of 3280/32768, and a probability of 164/32768 At ART return type "navi return", win the ART return type "precursor return" with a probability of 1476/32768.

[BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table wins the BGZ mode based on the internal winning combination and the presence or absence of a lock game in the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) during the normal middle process (see FIG. 286 described later). It is used to determine the type (including non-winning).

  The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table is a winning type of BGZ mode (not winning, BGZ mode 1 winning and BGZ mode 2 winning) set for each type of combination of presence / absence of lock game and internal winning combination. Define the correspondence with the lottery value.

  BGZ stock lottery (normal time) Combination type of presence or absence of lock game and internal winning combination defined in the table "S No Other" is a game lock called "short lock" (corresponds to lock numbers 1 and 2) And the internal winning combination is other than the "chance of chance" (internal winning combination corresponding to the data pointer 49). The combination type “S with chance” of the presence or absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination corresponds to the case where the short lock is performed and the internal winning combination is “the chance eye”. In addition, the combination type “S without R2 ice” of presence or absence of lock game and internal winning combination relates to “ice” of the data pointer 43 or 44 in a state where short lock is not performed and lock number 2 is won. Corresponds to the case where the small role wins the inside.

  Further, “BGZ mode 1” defined in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table corresponds to BGZ without navigation, and “BGZ mode 2” corresponds to BGZ with navigation.

  In the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) using the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table, first, the randomness extracted from the range of predetermined numerical values (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) A numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (including non-winning) of the BGZ mode in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the winning classification in the BGZ mode at that time is won.

  For example, if the combination type of the presence or absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination is "S without chance chance", the BGZ mode is not won with the probability of 24576/32768, and the BGZ mode 1 is with the probability of 7864/32768. It wins and BGZ mode 2 wins with the probability of 328/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the normal state, when the BGZ mode is won, the BGZ with navigation may be won.

[BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table]
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table. The BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table is processing during ART preparation (described later, see FIG. 289), processing during ART described later (refer to FIGS. 291 through 293 described later), and processing during XR described later (FIG. 297 described later). In BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) during each processing of XRC during processing (refer to FIG. 301 described later) and see below (see FIG. 299), the winning classification of BGZ mode based on the presence / absence of internal winning combination and lock game Used in determining (including non-winning).

  The BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table configuration (combination type of presence or absence of lock game and internal winning combination and winning type of BGZ mode) is the above-mentioned BGZ stock lottery except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is the same as that of the (normal) table, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

  In the BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) using the BGZ stock lottery (during ART), first, random values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) A numerical value is sequentially subtracted in the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table by the lottery value for each winning type (including non winning) of the BGZ mode. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the winning classification in the BGZ mode at that time is won.

  For example, if the combination type of the presence or absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination is "S without chance", the BGZ mode is not won with the probability of 19456/32768, and the BGZ mode 1 is with the probability of 1024/32768. BGZ mode 2 wins with a probability of 12288/32768.

[BGZ lottery game number table lottery table]
Next, various BGZ lottery game number tables and lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The BGZ lottery game number table lottery table determines the BGZ lottery table number in the BGZ lottery game table lottery process (simulation bonus end) during pseudo bonus end processing (at the time of winning) described later (refer to FIG. 314 described later). Used in

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 1) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 1. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 2) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 2. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 3) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 3. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 4) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 4. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 5) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 5. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 6) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 6. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 7) to be referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 7. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 8) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 8.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 9) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 9. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 10) to be referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 10. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 11) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 11. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 12) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 12. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 13) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 13. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 14) that is referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 14. And FIG. 179 is a figure which shows the structure of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 15) referred when the last BGZ lottery table number is 15. FIG.

  The BGZ lottery game number table lottery table defines the correspondence between the types of BGZ lottery table numbers (1 to 15) set for each pseudo bonus termination type (RB termination or BB termination) and their lottery values.

  BGZ lottery game number table In the BGZ lottery game table lottery process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) using the lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). In the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table, the obtained random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each BGZ lottery table number. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" is generated), it means that the BGZ lottery table number at that time is won.

  For example, if the previous BGZ lottery table number is 1 and the pseudo bonus termination type is RB termination, the BGZ lottery table number 4 wins with the probability of 8754/32768 and the BGZ lottery table with the probability of 5250/32768. Number 5 is won, BGZ lottery table number 6 is won with a probability of 700/32768, BGZ lottery table number 7 is won with a probability of 8754/32768, BGZ lottery table number 8 is won with a probability of 5250/32768 BGZ lottery table number 9 wins with a probability of 700 / 32,768.

  In this case, the BGZ lottery table No. 10 wins with a probability of 1500/32768, the BGZ lottery table No. 11 wins with a probability of 900/32768, and the BGZ lottery table No. 12 wins with a probability of 120/32768, The BGZ lottery table number 13 wins with the probability of 500/32768, the BGZ lottery table number 14 wins with the probability of 300/32768, and the BGZ lottery table number 15 wins with the probability of 40/32768.

[BG challenge contents lottery table]
Next, various BG challenge content lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The BG challenge content lottery table is used when determining the content of the correct / incorrect solution of the BG challenge (two-or-one effect) in the BG challenge content lottery process during BGZ processing (see FIG. 304 described later). Be In the present embodiment, a plurality of BG challenge modes (modes 0 to 3) are provided.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BG challenge content lottery table (part 1) that is referred to when the current BG challenge mode is 0 or 1. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BG challenge content lottery table (part 2) that is referred to when the current BG challenge mode is 2.

  The BG challenge content lottery table defines the correspondence between the content type of the correct / incorrect solution of the BG challenge (two-or-one effect) and the lottery value set for each internal winning combination. The type of internal winning combination defined in the BG challenge content lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the types of internal winning combinations defined in the BG challenge content lottery table will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the content type of the correct / incorrect answer of the BG challenge (two-or-one effect), "all incorrect," "left correct 1: not correct when correct 1", "left correct 1: not correct" Incorrect when selected "," Right correct 1: Uncorrected correct 1 "," Right correct 1: Uncorrected incorrect "," Both correct answer 1: Not correct 1 "," Left correct 2: Not selected " Correct Answer 2 "," Left Correct Answer 2: Incorrect when Deselected "," Right Correct Answer 2: Uncorrected Correct Answer 2 "," Right Correct 2: Uncorrected Correct Answer "and" Both Correct Answers 2: Correctly When Deselected 2 " 11 types of

  In the BG challenge content lottery process using the BG challenge content lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) The lottery table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each content type of the correct / incorrect solution of the BG challenge in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the content type of the correct / incorrect solution of the BG challenge at that time is won.

  For example, if the current BG challenge mode is 1 and the internal winning combination is "strong ice", as shown in FIG. 180, "left correct answer 1: non-selected correct answer 1", "left correct answer 1: Any one of "non-selected incorrect answer", "right correct 1: non-selected correct 1" and "right correct 1: non-selected incorrect" must be won. Further, for example, when the current BG challenge mode is 1 and the internal winning combination is "R2 ice", "both correct 1: uncorrected when correct 1" is always won.

[BG challenge mode transition table]
Next, various BG challenge mode transition tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The BG challenge mode transition table is used when determining the transition destination BG challenge mode in the BG challenge mode transition lottery processing during BGZ processing (see FIG. 304 described later).

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 1) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is no winning of a pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 2) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is no winning of pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 3) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is a winning of a pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 4) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is a winning of a pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ.

  Also, FIG. 186 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 5) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is no winning of a pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 6) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is no winning of pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (7) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is a winning of a pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 8) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is a winning of a pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ.

  The BG challenge mode transition table defines the correspondence between the type (0 to 3) of the transition BG challenge mode set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value thereof. Of the various internal winning combinations specified in the BG challenge mode transition table, except for “Bell prize (normal)” and “Bell prize (ART)”, the simulated bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. Same as described. "Bell prize (normal)" corresponds to the case where a small winning combination pertaining to "push order bell" of data pointers "39" to "41" is won internally in a normal state, and "bell prize (ART)" This corresponds to the case where the small winning combination according to the "push order bell" of the data pointers "39" to "41" is won internally in the ART state.

  In the BG challenge mode transition lottery process using the BG challenge mode transition table, first, BG challenge random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) In the mode transition table, subtraction is sequentially performed using the lottery value for each type of BG challenge mode. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the BG challenge mode at that time is won.

  For example, if the BGZ mode is 1, there is no simulated bonus winning other than the BGZ final game, and the internal winning combination is "strong ice", as shown in FIG. 182, the probability of 16384/32768, Win BG challenge mode 1 (no transition) and win BG challenge mode 2 with a probability of 16384/32768.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the columns (“pushing order bell”, “bell winning (normal)” and “bell winning (ART)”) related to “pushing order bell” in the BG challenge mode transition table are not referred to Do. That is, when a small winning combination according to "push order bell" is internally won, the BG challenge mode transition table is not referred to.

[Pressing order navigation lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 237, various push order navigation lottery tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery table defines, in a predetermined RT gaming state, a correspondence between a winning classification of push order navigation and its lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination.

  In the push order navigation generation lottery process using the push order navigation lottery table, first, the push order of the random value extracted from the range of predetermined numerical values (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value of the winning classification of push order navigation specified in the navigation lottery table. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" is generated), the winning classification of push order navigation at that time is won.

(1) Pushing Order Navi Lottery (Normal) Table With reference to FIGS. 190 to 193, various pushing order navigation lottery (normal) tables will be described. The push order navi lottery (normal) table is a push order navi occurrence lottery process in each process of the normal medium process (see FIG. 286 described later) and the pseudo bonus end standby process (see FIG. 313 described later). Used.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (normal) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (normal) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (normal) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 193 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (normal) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  In the push order navigation lottery (normal) table, as the winning classification of push order navigation, “left 1st navigation” (informs that the left reel 3L is to be stopped first), “middle 1st navigation” (middle reel 3C is 1st) "Notify to stop", "Right 1st navigation" (informing that the right reel 3R is stopped first), "Left-middle-right navigation" (Indicate notification of the stop order of "Left middle right"), "Left- "Right-middle navigation" (informing the stop order of "right and left"), "Medium-left-right navigation" (informing the stop order of "middle left and right"), "middle-right-left navigation" ("middle right left" Stop order), “right-left-middle navigation” (informing “right-left middle” stopping order), “right-middle-left navigation” (informing “right middle left” stopping order) and “navi "No occurrence" is defined.

  The contents of various internal winning combinations defined in the push order navigation lottery (normal) table are as follows. The "middle correct bell" is a small part of the "bell" internally winning in the data pointer "38". The “right-left-middle correct bell” is a small part of the “bell” internally winning in the data pointer “39”. The “right-middle-left correct bell” is a small part of the “bell” internally winning in the data pointer “40”. The “abnormal answer bell” is a small part of the “bell” internally winning in the data pointer “41”.

  “MB role (14 cards in left and right) (15 remaining)” is a data pointer in the situation where MB is in MB and the number of remaining medals paid out until the end of MB is 15 (the first game of MB game) This corresponds to the case where the small winning combination (code name “BM01”) pertaining to the “bell” of 14 is prescribed as the number of payouts specified in “51” or “52” is internally won. "MB role (14 middle left and right) (remaining 14 or less)" is data in the situation (the second game of MB game and after) which is in MB and the remaining payout number of medals until MB end is 14 or less This corresponds to the case where the small winning combination (code name "BM01") related to the 14 "bells" specified in the pointer "51" or "52" is internally won. “MB role (both 14 pieces) (15 remaining)” is the data pointer “53 in MB (the first game of the MB game) in which the remaining payout number of medals until MB end is 15 "-" Corresponds to the case where the small winning combination according to "bell" specified in "57" is won internally.

  "RT2 transition-middle-left-right rep" is a replay role played internally at data pointer "3". "RT2 transition-middle-right-left rep" is a replay role played internally at data pointer "4". "RT2 transition-right-left-middle rep" is a replay role played internally at data pointer "5". "RT2 transition-right-middle-left rep" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "6" or "7".

  "RT2 transition-middle-left-right (for RT4)" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "32". "RT2 transition-middle-right-left (for RT4)" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "33". "RT2 transition-right-left-middle (for RT4)" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "34". "RT2 transition-right-middle-left (for RT4)" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "35".

  "Left middle row don rep-middle 1st RT0" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "10". "Left middle column don rep-right 1st RT0" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "11". The "left don rep-middle 1st RT4" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "12". "Left don rep-right 1st RT4" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "13".

  "Left RB REPLY-1STRT0" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "14". "Left RB Rep-Right 1st RT0" is a replay role played internally by the data pointer "15". “1st during RT4 transition to RT3” is a replay role played internally for the data pointer “30”. "RT3 during RT3 shift right 1st" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "31".

  “1st during direct canial transition” corresponds to the case where the data pointer “1” is internally won in the RT4 gaming state and the lock number 4 is won in the game lock lottery. “Successive transition to the right cant 1st” corresponds to the case where the data pointer “1” is internally won in the RT4 gaming state and the lock number 5 is won in the game lock lottery.

  The "triple aiming don lip" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "8". Also, "triple aim continuous replay" is a replay role played internally for the data pointer "9".

(2) Pushing Order Navi Lottery (ART) Table With reference to FIGS. 194 to 197, various pushing order navigation lottery (ART) tables will be described. In addition, the push order navigation lottery (ART) table is an ART during processing described later (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), a rocket during processing described later (refer to FIGS. 302 and 303 described later), and a pseudo bonus end standby described later. It is used in push order navigation generation lottery processing during each processing of middle processing (see FIG. 313 described later).

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 196 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigator lottery (ART) table (the internal winning combination type and the push category of push order navigation) is the same configuration as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(3) Push Order Navi Lottery (XR Carnival Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 198 to 201, various push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) tables will be described. Note that the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table is a push order navigation during each processing of XR processing described later (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later) and XRC processing described later (see FIG. 301 described later). Used in the outbreak lottery process (XR Carnival transition).

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 201 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(4) Push Order Navi Lottery (RB Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, various push order navigation lottery (RB shift) tables will be described. The push order navi lottery (RB shift) table is used in the push order navi occurrence lottery process in the below-described process during the confirmation screen (see FIG. 306 described later).

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (RB shift) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Because of the configuration, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(5) Push Order Navi Lottery (Red 7 / Don BB Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 206 to 209, various push order navigation lottery (red 7 / Don BB transition) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table is used in the push order navigation generation / lottery process in the below-described in-process processing (see FIG. 306 described later).

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 · don BB transition) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (red 7 · don BB transition) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (red 7 · don BB transition) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 209 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (red 7 · don BB transition) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, the configuration of the push order navigation lottery (red 7 · don BB transition) table (internal winning combination type and winning order navigation type) is the above-described push order navigation lottery (normal) except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is the same as that of the table, the description of these table configurations is omitted.

(6) Push Order Navi Lottery (XBB Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 210 to 213, various push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process in the below-described process during the confirmation screen (see FIG. 306 described later).

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Because of the configuration, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(7) Push Order Navi Lottery (during pseudo bonus) Table With reference to FIGS. 214 to 217, various push order navi lottery (simulated bonus) tables will be described. In addition, the push order navigation lottery (during simulated bonus) table is processing during BB (see FIG. 308 described later), processing during NRB described later (refer to FIG. 310 described later), and processing during SRB described later (FIG. 311 described later). This is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process (during a pseudo bonus).

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navi lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 217 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(8) Push Order Navi Lottery (Demonstration State 0) Table With reference to FIGS. 218 to 221, various push order navigation lottery (presentation state 0) tables will be described. The push order navi lottery (effect state 0) table is used in the push order navi occurrence lottery process in the later-described XR in-process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later).

  FIG. 218 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 0) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 0) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 0) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 0) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, the configuration of the push order navigation lottery (production state 0) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(9) Push Order Navi Lottery (Effect State 1) Table With reference to FIG. 222 to FIG. 225, various push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) tables will be described. Note that the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table is used in the push order navigation generation / lottery process in the processing during XR described later (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later).

  FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 1) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 1) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 224 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 1) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 1) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, the configuration of the push order navigation lottery (production state 1) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(10) Push Order Navi Lottery (Effect State 2) Table With reference to FIG. 226 to FIG. 229, various push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) tables will be described. The push order navi lottery (effect state 2) table is used in the push order navi occurrence lottery process in the below-described process during XR (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later).

  FIG. 226 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 2) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 2) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 228 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 2) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 229 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (presentation state 2) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, the configuration of the push order navigation lottery (production state 2) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(11) Push Order Navi Lottery (BGZ Mode 2) Table With reference to FIGS. 230 to 233, various push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table is used in push order navigation generation / lottery processing (BGZ mode 2) during BGZ processing (see FIG. 304 described later).

  FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 232 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 233 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 4) to be referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the internal winning combination type and the hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(12) Push Order Navi Lottery (under ART Preparation) Table With reference to FIGS. 234 to 237, various push order navigation lottery (under ART preparation) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (during ART preparation) table is used in the push order navigation generation / lottery processing (during ART preparation) during the ART preparation processing (see FIG. 289 described later).

  FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (under ART preparation) table (part 1) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during ART preparation) table (part 2) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during ART preparation) table (part 3) that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 237 is a view showing the configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during ART preparation) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (during ART preparation) table (internal winning combination type and hit classification of push order navigation) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above except for the setting mode of the lottery value. The description of these table configurations will be omitted.

[Premonition game number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 238 to FIG. 252, the various precursor game number lottery tables will be described. The precursor game number lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning precursor game number and the lottery value set for each stock to be executed next (stock to be a target of the precursor game). In the present embodiment, the number of winning precursor games is any of 0 to 64 games.

  In the precursor game number lottery process using the precursor game number lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are used as the precursor game number The lottery value of the number of precursor games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative (a "marginal" occurs), the number of precursor games at that time is won.

(1) Table of Number of Leading Game Number Lottery (Normally Medium) FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the configuration of a number of flagging game number of medium (usually) table. The precursor game number random determination (normal) table is used in the precursor game number random determination processing (normal) during the below-described normal middle processing (see FIG. 286 described later).

(2) Indication Game Number Lottery (ART Transition) Table Next, with reference to FIG. 239 to FIG. 241, various indication game number lottery (ART transition) tables will be described. Note that the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (ART transition) during ART preparation processing (winning) (described later, see FIG. 290) described later.

  FIG. 239 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (part 1). The leading game number lottery (ART transition) table (1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 or more. FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (part 2). The precursor game number random determination (ART transition) table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prognostic game number random determination (ART transition) table (part 3). The precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (part 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 or less.

(3) Protagonist game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table With reference to FIGS. 242 to 245, the various precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table will be described. Note that the precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process in the later-described pseudo bonus end (at the time of winning) process (see FIG. 314 described later).

  FIG. 242 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prognostic game number random determination (simulation bonus end) table (part 1). The precursor game number lottery (simulation bonus end) table (part 1) is normally used at the time of transition. FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prologue game number random determination (simulation bonus end) table (part 2). The precursor game number lottery (simulation bonus end) table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 or more. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prologue game number random determination (simulation bonus end) table (part 3). The prognostic game number lottery (simulation bonus end) table (3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Further, FIG. 245 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursor game number random determination (simulation bonus end) table (part 4). The precursor game number lottery (simulation bonus end) table (No. 4) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 or less.

(4) Table of lottery of number of precursor games (during ART) A table of lottery of number of various precursor games (during ART) will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 to 248. FIG. Note that the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table is used in the precursor game number lottery processing (during ART, XR end) during XR release processing (see FIG. 294 described later).

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prophetic game number random determination (during ART) table (part 1). The precursory game number lottery (during ART) table (1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 or more. FIG. 247 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prognostic game number random determination (during ART) table (part 2). The precursory game number lottery (during ART) table (2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Also, FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (part 3). The precursor game number random determination (during ART) table (3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 games or less.

(5) Protagonist Game Number Lottery (XR End) Table With reference to FIGS. 249 to 251, the various precursor game number lottery (XR end) table will be described. Note that the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (during ART, XR end) in the below-described XR release process (see FIG. 294 described later).

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the configuration of a prognostic game number random determination (XR end) table (part 1). The precursor game number random determination (XR end) table (1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 or more. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursory game number lottery (XR end) table (part 2). The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Further, FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (part 3). The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 or less.

(6) Protagonist game number lottery (at the end of ART) table FIG. 252 shows a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (at the time of ART end) table. The precursor game number lottery (at the time of ART termination) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (at the time of ART termination) in the below-described processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later).

<Various processing for fraud etc>
The pachi slot 1 of the present embodiment has various functions for coping when a fraudulent act or the like called for example occurs. Here, various measures to be taken by the sub control circuit 42 when a fraud occurs will be described.

[Corrective action when display (winning) command failure occurs]
In the present embodiment, at the time of a bet operation (at the time of receiving a medal insertion command), the sub CPU 81 performs sequence error detection processing (determination processing) of a command transmitted from the main CPU 51 to the sub CPU 81. Then, when the reception of the display command of the previous game can not be confirmed by the sequence error detection processing of this command, that is, when an error called display (winning) command zeroing is detected due to an illegal act or the like, In the previous game (the game in which the display command has occurred), various lottery processes that should have been performed at the time of receiving the display command are performed. In this case, even if the goto action is performed, the next game is started in the same state as the state in which the game was normally performed. In addition, various lottery processing at the time of display command reception performed at this time changes according to the sub game state at the time of display (winning) command zero occurrence.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a display (winning) command zero occurs, “a navigation neglect occurrence state of the first stop operation” is set as a penalty. In this case, even if the XRC mode game is won in the ART or XR mode game, the winning in the XRC mode is forcibly invalidated (processing during ART (prize in ART in FIG. 296 described later and in FIG. 300 described later). Processing during XR (see winning)).

  When the above-mentioned handling method for display (winning) command failure occurs, the next game is started as in the normal operation even if the goto action is performed, so the goto action can be invalidated. Further, in this case, even if the goto action is performed, the normal game (including the occurrence of a penalty) is continued, so that the goto measures can be executed without putting a burden on the gaming shop.

[Corrective action when start command zero occurs in XBB mode]
In the pachislot 1 of this embodiment, in a simulated bonus game in XBB mode, if the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT3 gaming state at the time of receiving the start command (the timing at which the lever is operated) (state illegal). It is determined that an error called start command zeroing (a state in which the sub CPU 81 can not confirm reception of the start command) has been detected due to an unauthorized action. Then, when such a start command zero occurs, as a penalty, the sub gaming state is shifted from the XBB mode pseudo bonus to the BB mode pseudo bonus.

  When such a start command failure method is adopted, the game right of the XBB mode pseudo bonus disappears, so that, for example, the illegal addition (grant of benefits) in the XBB mode pseudo bonus is prevented. be able to.

<Various processing when the status is invalid>
The pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment has various handling functions when an inconsistency in the gaming state occurs in the flow of the game (when the state is fraudulent). Here, various types of penalty processing (processing at the time of incorrect state) performed in the sub control circuit 42 when the state is incorrect will be described.

[Processing when the status of the “immediate release” pseudo bonus wins]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the above-described various pseudo bonus lottery tables, “don't BB” and “XBB (XBB1, XBB2)” are used as the win types of the “immediate release” pseudo bonus (RT3 direct transition replay). ) Is prepared. And, as described above, the XBB mode pseudo bonus of “immediate release” is the case where the data pointer is “9” (when the internal winning combination is “right middle match” or “right middle match R3”) Win a).

  However, in the present embodiment, when the data pointer is “9”, as shown in the correspondence table between the internal winning combination in FIG. 64 and the stop order, when the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, the code name “R304” ( The symbol combination of the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination according to G_RT3 transition lip 4) is stop-controlled with priority over the effective line. In addition, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the code name "R304" (G_RT3 transition lip _ 4) is the symbol "DON"-"DON"-"DON" (center middle match) and the winning combination (displayed in XBB mode) Role).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time in a state where the XBB mode pseudo bonus of "immediate release" is won (when the data pointer is "9"), the XBB mode pseudo bonus is In fact, it is a configuration that does not win a prize (a configuration in which a state irregularity occurs). In other words, in the present embodiment, when the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo bonus is won, a rule for substantially stopping the first reel other than the right reel 3R is defined. When the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, ignoring), a pseudo bonus other than the XBB mode (a pseudo bonus in the BB mode in this embodiment) is won. In this case, the pseudo bonus of the BB mode of "Don BB" or "Red 7 BB" is set as the sub gaming state.

  Therefore, in the Pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the XBB mode pseudo bonus of "immediate release" is won, the above-mentioned state illegal process is performed even if the pseudo bonus is established ignoring the rule (game property). As a result, it is possible to prevent the maximum profit (XBB mode game) from being obtained by a simpler method.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus of the “immediate release” Don BB mode is won when the data pointer is “8” (when the internal winning combination is “straight match”). In this case, as shown in the correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stopping order in FIG. 64, even if the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, the rule of the stopping order such as “immediate release” XBB mode winning Is not provided, and the "immediate release" Don BB mode pseudo bonus is configured to win. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time when the “immediate release” pseudo bonus is won (when the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (“1”) state), “immediately The pseudo bonus of the BB mode is configured to be set as the sub gaming state regardless of the winning type of the pseudo bonus of “release” (refer to the processing (winning) in the final screen of FIG. 307 described later).

[Process when status is incorrect when winning a simulated bonus]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the RT after the third stop (at the time of winning) in the game in which the bonus bonus is won and “middle 1st navigation” (notice of an instruction to stop the middle reel 3C first) is generated. When the gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state, that is, when the state irregularity occurs due to the navigation neglected, the sub gaming state is shifted from the next game to the Don BB mode simulated bonus regardless of the type of the simulated bonus won. (Refer to the processing (winning) in the confirmation screen of FIG. 307 described later). That is, even if the pseudo bonus of the XBB mode is won, the right to obtain the XBB mode disappears if the push order navigation of the "middle 1st navigation" is ignored.

  By performing the state illegal process at the time of such pseudo bonus winning, extension of the flag between the flags by push order navigation neglect is executed, and it is prevented that an unfair advantage is enjoyed by various lottery of the life extension period. it can. In addition, since the coping method of the above-mentioned state illegal time (nav ignore) is a method composed of the transition processing of the sub gaming state and the penalty processing of the right of extinction of XBB mode, it copes with the navigator neglect by a simpler method. can do.

[Process when state is false when pseudo bonus ends]
In the pachislot 1 of this embodiment, when the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT3 gaming state at the end of the simulated bonus (when the state fraud is occurring), when the sub gaming state is the bonus end standby state A process is performed (refer to the process after S913 in processing at the time of a pseudo bonus end (at the time of winning) of FIG. 314 described later). As a result of this processing, the normal sub game state corresponding to the RT game state at the end of the simulated bonus is set. Also, in this state illegal process, as a further penalty process, 20 games are usually set in the penalty counter. Although not shown, the value of the normal penalty counter is decremented by "1" when the start command is received, when the sub gaming state is normal. In addition, when the value of the normal penalty counter is other than "0"("1" or more), depending on the sub game state of the game being executed, subtraction processing of the number of XR ceiling games described later, the game state A penalty of not performing various lottery processes (pseudo bonus lottery process in each process, XR lottery process, BGZ stock lottery process, etc.) for making a state in which a player can easily receive a profit is appropriately imposed. Further, in the present embodiment, the display combination according to the push order bell, the display combination according to the code name “BM01” (G_14) by the irregular push (pushing order other than left first stop) when the navigation is not generated (other than during ART). If any of the display combinations related to replays other than the sheet bell) and the code name “R301” (G_RT3 transition lip_1) to “R311” (G_RT3 transition lip_11) is established (display stop), the respective combination In accordance with, a predetermined value is added to the value of the penalty counter.

  By performing the above-mentioned state illegal time process at the time of the end of the simulated bonus, even if it is a state transitioned to the RT gaming state which is not normal (navigated ignoring state), the regular corresponding to the RT gaming state Since the sub gaming state can be set, the sub gaming state can be returned to the normal state without performing special processing.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, contents of various processing executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power on) of the pachislot 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to a main flow chart (hereinafter referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the pachi slot 1 is powered on, the main CPU 51 performs initialization processing at power on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the setting has been properly changed, etc., and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. Here, the designated storage area is, for example, a storage area in which it is necessary to erase data for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storing area and a display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, a check of the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is performed. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs random number acquisition processing (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts random number values (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number values in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs effect random number acquisition processing (S5). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts effect random number values (0 to 65535) used in the game lock lottery, and stores the extracted random number values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect random number values can be extracted.

  Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the random number value storage area, the main CPU 51 performs internal lottery processing (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs game lock lottery processing (S7). In this process, the type of "game lock" is determined by lottery based on the effect random number value extracted in S5. The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel stop initialization processing (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 259 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs start command transmission processing (S9). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Further, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. The start command is configured to include a parameter specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, a lock (reel effect) and a lock timer corresponding to the type (lock number, continuous lock number) of the “game lock” determined in the process of S7 are mainly set. Then, the main CPU 51 waits until the lock timer reaches zero. Further, in the present embodiment, in this process, the acceleration pattern (normal pattern) of the reel at the normal time (during non-lock effect) is also set as the reel effect pattern.

  In the process of S10, when the lock number is 1 or more, the lock (reel effect) and lock timer corresponding to the lock number are set. Also, for example, when the continuous lock number (including 0) is acquired, the lock (reel effect) and the lock timer corresponding to the continuous lock number are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs wait processing (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed from the start of the previous game, the main CPU 51 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses. When the reel effect pattern set in S10 is a pattern in which the game lock is performed, the main CPU 51 does not execute the weight process of S11. That is, the weight processing of S11 is executed only when the reel effect pattern set in S10 is a normal pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel rotation start processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all the reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, driving of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is performed by an interrupt process (see FIG. 276 described later) which is executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. After that, each reel is controlled to accelerate until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and is controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command transmission process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a drawing priority storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority order storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 260 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel stop control processing (S15). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 263 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and thereafter in FIG. 62) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 58). Further, in this process, after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are all stopped, the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line (winning determination line) and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29) Match Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal payout processing (S17). In this process, driving of the hopper 33 and updating of the number of credits are performed based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15, and payout of medals is performed. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals paid out differs depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout The number of sheets (upper limit of payout) is 15.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S18). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT gaming state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 272 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs payout end command transmission processing (S19). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the payout end command transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs bonus end check processing (S20). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters for managing an end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is ended. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs effect control processing at the end of the game (S21). In this processing, control processing of the rendering state is mainly performed. In addition, the details of the game end effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 274 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs bonus operation check processing (S22). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game, and whether or not to play again. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 275 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

  As described above, the main control circuit 41 executes the start command transmission process (S9), the reel rotation start command transmission process (S13) and the payout end command transmission process (S19) of the main flow according to the present embodiment. Ru. Further, in the present embodiment, as described later, in addition to these commands, various commands (for example, a medal insertion command, a reel stop command, a display command, a bonus start command, a bonus end command, The main control circuit 41 executes transmission processing of a no-operation command and the like.

  Further, as described above, in the processing of the main flow of the present embodiment, control processing of the game lock is performed (S10), and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 doubles as a means (lock control means) for controlling the lock function.

[Medal acceptance and start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the medal reception / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether there is an automatic input request (S31). The determination of the presence or absence of the automatic insertion request is performed by determining whether the automatic insertion counter is "0". That is, the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request when the automatic insertion counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic insertion request when the automatic insertion counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination relating to replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination relating to the re-game is established, medals for the number inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  In S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic input request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic input process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later.

  In the process of S32, the main CPU 51 also performs a medal insertion command transmission process. In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the medal insertion command transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted cards and the like.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no request for automatic insertion in S31 (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance permission (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is driven, and the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 14 is accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets to “3”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted in S35 (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs medal insertion check processing (S36). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when the medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal insertion command transmission processing (S37). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the medal insertion command transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the inserted number is the game startable number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is not the game startable number (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35, and repeats the processes in and after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game startable number (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S39 described later. In the present embodiment, the game startable number is “3” regardless of the game state (see FIG. 32).

  After the processing of S32, if S35 is NO or S38 is YES, the main CPU 51 determines whether the start switch is on (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes of S35 and subsequent steps.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance prohibition processing (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 24. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Internal lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the internal lottery processing performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S51). That is, main CPU 51 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59), and the type and number of times of internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 32). decide. The lottery number indicates the number of times the subtraction of the lottery value and the determination as to whether or not the digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs lottery value change processing (S52). In this process, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 are changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random value for internal lottery stored in the random number storage area (S53). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as an initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random value for internal lottery (S54).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S54 is less than “0” (negative value) (S55). In S55, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than “0” (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S59 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that the calculation result is not less than “0” (S55 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number and the winning number (S56). Specifically, the value of the operation result is taken as a random number value, and the winning number is added by "1".

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S57). When it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (if the determination in S57 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S54 and repeats the processes in and after S54.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (if YES in S57), the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the winning number (S58).

  After the processing of S58, or if S55 is a YES determination, the main CPU 51 performs winning number correction processing (S59). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer when the gaming state is the non-MB (non-CB) gaming state, and when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state A value obtained by adding “51” to the value of the winning number is set as a data pointer. The details of the winning number correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 39 and 40), and acquires an internal winning combination based on the data pointer (S60).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S61). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the carryover combination storage area based on the data of bits 4 to 7 ("C_MB1" to "C_MB4") of the internal winning combination storing area 2 (S62).

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S63). Then, after the processing of S63, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 doubles as a means (internal winning combination determination means) for executing the internal winning combination determination process.

[Lottery value change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the lottery value changing process performed in S52 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT0 gaming state flag is on with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59) (S71). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether “1” is set to bit 0 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 59). Then, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT0 gaming state flag is on (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value change processing, and the processing is an internal lottery processing (FIG. 255). Move to S53 of reference).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S71 that the RT0 gaming state flag is not on (S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 selects an internal lottery table for RT corresponding to the RT gaming state in the on state. The lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 of the internal gaming table for general gaming state (see FIG. 33) are changed with reference to (S72). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S53 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255).

[Hot number correction process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the winning number correction process performed in S59 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer (S81). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not CB (MB) is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 59) (S82).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S82 that the CB (MB) is not in operation (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S84 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the CB (MB) is in operation in S 82 (when the determination in S 82 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds “51” to the value of the data pointer and adds the value Is set as a data pointer (S83).

  After the processing of S83, or if S82 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether the gaming state is MB carry over and the winning number is 50 (S84). When the main CPU 51 determines in S84 that the determination condition of S84 is not satisfied (when S84 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the winning number correction process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 255). Transfer to S60.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S84 that the determination condition of S84 is satisfied (when the determination in S84 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets 0 in the data pointer (S85). Then, after the processing of S85, the main CPU 51 ends the winning number correction processing, and shifts the processing to S60 of the internal lottery processing (see FIG. 255).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is less than "2" (S91).

  In S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is less than "2" (in the case of YES determination in S91), the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIGS. 52 to 56). Then, the game lock lottery is performed based on the effect random number (S92). By this processing, when the game lock is won, the main CPU 51 sets a corresponding game lock flag and a lock timer. In addition, when the game lock of the lock number 4 or 5 is won, the game lock is not performed in the winning unit game (the current unit game) and the pressing order of the stop button is the predetermined pressing order (pushing order correctness At the time, the player locks the game in the next unit game. Then, after the process of S92, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S91 that the value of the effect state is not less than 2 (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the effect state is 3 or more. (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not “3” or more (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S93 that the value of the effect state is "3" or more (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 selects the lottery table (see FIG. 57) during the continuous game lock state. The continuous game lock lottery process is performed based on the effect random number value (S94).

  In the process of S94, when the value of the effect state is less than "5", that is, when the current unit game is the first game or the second game of the XRC mode, the main CPU 51 selects the effect lottery value. Let the value which doubled be the lottery value for effects. By this processing, in the first game or the second game in the XRC mode, the continuous game lock lottery is always won, and the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed.

  Then, in the process of S94, when the continuous game lock lottery is won, the main CPU 51 sets the number of remaining winning lottery wins as a continuous lock number. On the other hand, when the continuous game lock lottery is not won, the main CPU 51 sets “0” to the continuous lock number and sets “6” to the value of the effect state. In this process, even when the internal winning combination is a rare combination (including the data pointer 58), the effect lottery value is doubled to always win the continuous game lock lottery (continue determination). Good.

  After the processing of S94 or S92, or if S93 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts one from the value of the effect game counter (S95). The effect game counter is a counter that manages the number of precursor games in the XRC mode.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the effect game counter is "0" (S96). In S96, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect game counter is not "0" (when the determination in S96 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S8 of).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S96 that the value of the effect game counter is "0" (when the determination in S96 is YES), the main CPU 51 selects the lottery table (see FIG. 57) during the continuous game lock state. The continuous game lock lottery process is performed based on the effect random number value (S97). Then, after the processing of S97, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Reel stop initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the number-of-turning-stop number selection table (see FIG. 41), and based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) acquired in the internal lottery processing of S6 in FIG. The number is acquired (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initialization setting table (see FIG. 42) and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 51 corresponds to the acquired number for stopping rotation, the drawing priority order table selection table number, the drawing priority order table number, the order pressing table selection data, the order pressing table change data, the order pressing The time table change initial data and the irregular press time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initialization setting processing, and shifts the processing to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 253). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Import priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, a drawing priority priority storage process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 stores the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S111). Next, the main CPU 51 performs search target reel determination processing (S112). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S112, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is determined first as a search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S121 to be described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S112 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel next. Then, various processes up to S121 to be described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S112 again, the right reel 3R is determined as a search target reel next.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs pull-in priority order table selection processing (S113). In this process, the pull-in priority order table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority order table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 261 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as symbol position data, and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S114). Then, the main CPU 51 performs symbol code storage processing (S115). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes corresponding to the number of effective lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 262 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 58) based on the symbol code acquired in S115 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62) (S116). At this time, regardless of the presence or absence of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the information on the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the displayable part corresponding to the symbol code storage area) is updated for each stopped reel. At this time, the displayable part may be obtained from data prepared in advance that indicates the correspondence between the symbol of the stopped reel and the corresponding displayable part, or the symbol of the stopped reel And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable part changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs pull-in priority order acquisition processing (S117). In this process, for the main CPU 51, priority is given to the pull-in priority for the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 58) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. Acquisition priority data is acquired with reference to the order table (see FIG. 48).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 63) (S118). At this time, the drawing priority order data is stored in the drawing priority order data storage area so that the value of each priority order corresponds to the bit of the storage area. Next, the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the symbol position data and subtracts “1” from the symbol check count (S119).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol check count is "0" (S120). When the main CPU 51 determines in S120 that the symbol check frequency is not “0” (when the determination in S120 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S115 and repeats the processes after S115.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S120 that the symbol check frequency is "0" (when the determination in S120 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches has been searched (S121).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S121 that the search has not been performed for the number of searches (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S112 and repeats the processes after S112. On the other hand, when determining in S121 that the main CPU 51 has searched for the number of searches (when S121 is a YES determination), the main CPU 51 ends the drawing priority storing process and proceeds to S15 of the main flow (see FIG. 253). Transfer to

[Import priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the drawing priority order table selection process performed in S113 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storage process (see FIG. 260) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the drawing priority order table number is set, that is, whether or not the drawing priority order table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S131). ). In S131, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority table number is set (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority table selection processing, and the processing is stored in pull-in priority The process moves to S114 in the process (see FIG. 260).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority order table number is not set in S131 (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 61) and the operation stop button. Referring to the area (see FIG. 60), the corresponding drawing priority order table number is set (S132). Then, after the process of S132, the main CPU 51 ends the drawing priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S114 of the drawing priority order storage process (see FIG. 260).

  In S132, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area to acquire data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired drawing priority order table number.

[Symbol code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, symbol code storage processing performed at S115 in the flowchart of the retraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 260) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S141). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the valid line data (S142). For example, in the case where the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire middle information of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S143). Then, after storing the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, the main CPU 51 ends the symbol code storage processing, and shifts the processing to S116 of the drawing priority storage processing (see FIG. 260).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the reel stop control process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 performs stop button detection processing (S151). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed and determines whether the left stop button has been pressed in the first stop operation. The details of the stop button detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 264 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 61) and an operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 60) based on the detection result of the stop button detection process of S151 (determination result of the stop button pressed effectively). Is updated (S152). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the stop button non-operation counter (S153).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S154). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S155).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs sliding symbol number determination processing (S156). The details of the process for determining the number of sliding symbols will be described later with reference to FIG. 265 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S157). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores data of a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding symbols, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The information on the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols determined in S156, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 53 (S158). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding symbols to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the planned stop position determined in S158 as a search symbol position (S159). Next, the main CPU 51 performs symbol code storage processing described with reference to FIG. 262 (S160). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62) using the symbol code acquired in S160 (S161).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs control change processing (S162). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the pressed stop button has been released (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (S163 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S163 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has been released in S163 (when the determination in S163 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S164). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores data of a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. At this time, the data configuration of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted at S157. However, the information of ON edge / OFF edge included in the reel stop command transmitted in S164 is different from the information of ON edge / OFF edge included in the reel stop command transmitted in S157.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S165). In S165, when the main CPU 51 determines that the non-operation counter is not "0" (when S165 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the drawing priority storing process described with reference to FIG. 260 (S166). . Thereafter, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S151, and repeats the processes after S151.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S165 that the inactivity counter is "0" (when the determination in S165 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control processing, and the main flow processing (FIG. 253). Move to S16 of reference).

  As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 doubles as means (stop control means) for executing stop control of the rotation of the reel (variation display of symbols).

[Stop button detection process]
Next, the stop button detection processing performed in S151 in the flowchart of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether there is a stop button that has been pressed (S171). In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop button pressed is not present (when S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process, and the process is performed to stop the reel control process (see FIG. 263). Move to S152 of

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is a stop button pressed in S171 (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation. (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation of the stop button is not the first stop operation (when the determination in S172 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S175 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S172 that the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation (when the determination in S172 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed. (S173). In this process, when there is one stop button pressed by the first stop operation, the main CPU 51 determines whether the left stop button 17L is pressed. Further, in this process, when there are a plurality of stop buttons pressed by the first stop operation, the main CPU 51 determines whether the left stop button 17L is included in the plurality of stop buttons pressed. Determine.

  In S173, when the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button 17L is not pressed (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S175 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S173 that the left stop button 17L has been pressed (when the determination in step S173 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the left stop button 17L as a stop button that is effectively pressed (S174). . Then, after the processing of S174, the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection processing, and shifts the processing to S152 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

  If S172 or S173 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (S175). When the main CPU 51 determines that the plurality of stop buttons have been pressed in S175 (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection processing, and the processing is processing for stopping the reels (see FIG. 263). Move to S152 of That is, when a plurality of stop buttons are pressed in the stop operation other than the first stop operation, or when the stop button pressed in the first stop operation does not include the left stop button, The pressing operation is treated as an invalid operation.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S175 that the plurality of stop buttons are not pressed (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is the stop button of the rotating reel. It is determined whether or not (S176). In S176, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is not the stop button of the rotating reel (in the case of NO determination in S176), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection processing and stops the processing for the reels. The process moves to S152 in the control process (see FIG. 263). That is, when the pressed stop button is the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel, the pressing operation of the stop button is treated as an invalid operation.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S176 that the pressed stop button is the stop button of the rotating reel (when the determination in S176 is YES), the main CPU 51 validates the pressed stop button. It sets as a stop button (S177). Then, after the processing of S177, the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection processing, and shifts the processing to S152 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

  As described above, in S171 to S174 of the stop button detection process of the present embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first stop operation of the reel, the left stop button 17L is pressed Is validated, and pressing of other stop buttons is invalidated. Then, this process is executed by the main CPU 51. That is, in the present embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first stop operation of the reel, the main CPU 51 determines the pressing operation of the left stop button 17L as the valid pressing operation. Double as a means to

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the process for determining the number of sliding symbols performed in S156 of the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this processing, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “10000000” in which “1” is set to bit 7 corresponding to “left reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Choose Also, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00010000” in which “1” is set to the bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Do. Also, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00000010” in which “1” is set to bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Do.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the first stop (stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). When the main CPU 51 determines that the first stop is not made in S182 (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 266 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S182 that the first stop has occurred (YES in S182), the main CPU 51 determines whether the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the forward press table selection data and the symbol counter (S185). In this process, the forward press tab selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initialization setting table (see FIG. 42). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the stop table for first press at the time of the first press corresponding to the table selection data for the first press, and acquires sliding piece number determination data and change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 51 acquires irregular push table selection data, and selects the irregular push table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular press time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 42).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs line mask data change processing (S189). The details of the line mask data change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 268 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 refers to the set irregular press time stop table, and acquires sliding piece number determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  After the processing of S183, S186 or S190, the main CPU 51 performs priority attraction control processing (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority order data are compared according to each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” or “1” from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. The details of the priority attraction control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the sliding symbol number determination processing, and shifts the processing to S157 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the second and third stop processing performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination processing (see FIG. 265) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether it is a second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the time of the second stop operation (when the determination of S201 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second stop operation is being performed (S201 is a YES determination) in S201, the main CPU 51 sequentially presses the stop button (first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). When the main CPU 51 determines that the forward pressing is not performed in S202 (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S202 that the forward pressing is performed (YES in S202), the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267 described later.

  After the process of S203, or if S201 or S202 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S204). The details of the line mask data change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 268 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs sliding symbol number search processing (S205). In this process, with reference to the stop table (FIG. 43, FIG. 45 and FIG. 46), sliding piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 51 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position, a search is sequentially performed to determine whether the corresponding data is "1". Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as slide number determination data. Then, after the process of S205, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processes, and shifts the process to S191 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 265).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 267, the line change bit to be performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination process (see FIG. 265) and in S203 in the flowcharts of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is “1”, and the B-line status is set when the change status is “2”. Then, after the process of S212, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check process, and the process proceeds to S189 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). ) In step S204).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S211 that the change status is not “1” or “2” (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the row corresponding to the “middle reel line change bit” or the “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 45 and 46), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is It is determined whether or not it is "1". When the main CPU 51 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not turned on (S213 is NO), the main CPU 51 selects the line change bit. The check process ends, and the process proceeds to S189 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 265) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is on (S213 is YES determination), the main CPU 51 The line status is set (S214). The B-line status is data used to change line mask data. Then, after the process of S214, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is a flow chart of S189 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). ) In step S204).

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 268, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination process (see FIG. 265) and in S204 in the flowcharts of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the C-line status is set (S221). The setting of the C-line status is performed when it is a forward push in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 271) described later.

  In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C-line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button or not. It discriminates (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop time is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop will be the right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00000010" to "10000000" by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" in the stop table for the forward press second and third stops (see FIG. 45) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is the flow chart of S190 of the sliding number determination processing (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266). Move to the process of S205 in).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the left twice ( S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second / third stop table for stopping at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is the flow chart of S190 of the sliding number determination processing (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266). Move to the process of S205 in).

  Here, returning to the description of the process of S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C-line status is not set in S221 (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the B-line status. It is determined whether or not it has been set (S225). When the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is not set in S225 (when S225 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the number of sliding symbols determination processing (FIG. (S265) or S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S225 that the B-line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 45 and 46) is referred to. Then, after the process of S226, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change process, and the process proceeds to S190 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). Move to the process of S205 in).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the priority attraction-in control processing performed in S191 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination processing (see FIG. 265) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIGS. 49 and 50) in accordance with the game state (S231). Next, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value to the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value to the number of checks. Specifically, when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state and the search target reel is a reel for which the maximum number of sliding symbols is stop-controlled at one frame, the initial value of the number of checks is " Set "2", otherwise set "5" as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the top address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of sliding symbols to the predicted start-time stop address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the retraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the retraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the retraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the retraction priority data acquired earlier (in the case of NO determination in S236), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired first (in the case of YES determination in S236), the main CPU 51 slips in S234. The number of frames is retracted (S237).

  After the process of S237, or if S236 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the number of checks and adds “1” to the search order counter (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the number of checks is “0” (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S239 that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of sliding symbols saved (S240). Then, after the processing of S240, the main CPU 51 ends the priority attraction-in control processing, and also ends the number of sliding symbols determination processing (see FIG. 265).

Control change processing
Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the control change process performed in S162 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether it is after the third stop (S251). In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the third stop (when S251 is a YES determination), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and the process proceeds to S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S251 that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second stop has been made (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a second post-stop control process (S253). The details of the second post-shutdown control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 271 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S252 that it is not after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not forward pressing is performed (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 51 determines that forward pressing is not performed (S254 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the forward press is made in S 254 (when the determination in S 254 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the forward press control change table according to the forward press table change data (see FIG. 44). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a planned stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the change target position in accordance with the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position does not match the planned stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the number of searches is “0”. (S259).

  In S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S259 that the number of searches is “0” (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 51 sequentially advances the value of the table change initial data at the time of the second push. The third stop table number is acquired and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” to the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S258 that the updated change target position matches the planned stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a second push on the basis of the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S 262).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a corresponding stop table based on the forward press second and third stop table numbers for stop (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 263).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 270) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not forward pressing is performed (S271). When the main CPU 51 determines in S271 that forward pressing is not performed (S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing after the second stop and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 270). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the main CPU 51 is the forward push in S 271 (when the determination in S 271 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) It is determined (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 in the control change process (see FIG. 270). When the main CPU 51 determines in step S272 that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in step S272 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the second post-stop control change process and also performs the control change process (see FIG. See also 270).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S272 that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). When the main CPU 51 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 270) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop is on in S 273 (when the determination in S 273 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the stored order. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the processing of S275, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing after the second stop and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 270).

[RT control processing]
Next, RT control processing performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 31), and checks the transition condition of the RT gaming state which can be established in the RT gaming state of the transition source (current) (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether a transition condition of the RT gaming state is established (S282). When the main CPU 51 determines in S282 that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S282 that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 31) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the transfer destination RT gaming state flag is set to a predetermined bit of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59), and the gaming state flag storage area is updated (S 283).

  After the process of S283, or if S282 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a display command transmission process (S284). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores data of a display command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying a display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control processing, and shifts the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  As described above, the RT control process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 doubles as a means (replay time state control means) for performing transition control of the RT gaming state.

[Bonus end check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the bonus end check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 59), and determines whether “MB” is in operation (S291). In S291, when the main CPU 51 determines that “MB” is not in operation (S291 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S21.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that "MB" is in operation in S291 (when S291 is a YES determination), the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" or not. (S292).

  In S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when the determination in S292 is “YES”), the main CPU 51 performs bonus end processing (S293). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the gaming state flag (MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the "MB" in operation. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds 14 during the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs bonus end command transmission processing (S294). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S295). Then, after the processing of S295, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S292 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (in the case of NO determination in S292), the main CPU 51 determines each value of the number-of-winnings counter and the possible number-of-games counter. Update (S296). The value of the possible wins counter is decremented by "1" when the small winning combination (the combination with the payout of medals) is displayed, and the value of the possible plays counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible number-of-games counter is “0” (S297). In S297, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible number-of-games counter is not "0" (when S297 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. Then, the process proceeds to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S297 that the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible number-of-games counter is “0” (when S297 is YES), the main CPU 51 processes at CB end (S298). Specifically, processing such as turning off the gaming state flag (CB gaming state flag) corresponding to "CB", clearing the possible number-of-times counter and the possible number-of-games counter is performed. Then, after the processing of S298, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[End of game effect control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the end-of-game effect control process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is "6" (S301).

  In S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is “6” (when S301 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not "6" (S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is less than "3" and the RT It is determined whether there is a transition of the gaming state (S302).

  In S302, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S302 is satisfied (when the determination in S302 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S302 that the determination condition of S302 is not satisfied (S302 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the lock number is "4" or "5". (S303).

  In S303, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock number is “4” or “5” (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S311 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S303 that the lock number is not "4" or "5" (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs pressing order check processing (S304). In this process, the main CPU 51 combines the internal winning combination and the stopping order in the current unit game according to the winning combination, stopping order, and RT transition correspondence table (only in the data pointer 32-35 columns) shown in FIG. 66. The transition contents of the RT gaming state corresponding to and the transition contents of the lock state are confirmed.

  After the process of S304, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the lock state is "reset" based on the result of the pressing order check process of S304 (S305). In S305, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the lock state is "reset" (when the determination in S305 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S305 that the transition of the lock state is not "reset" (when the determination in S305 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S307 described later.

  If the determination in S301, S302 or S305 is YES, the main CPU 51 performs effect state reset processing (S306). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the effect game counter and sets “0” to the value of the effect state. Then, after the processing of S306, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control processing, and shifts the processing to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  When the determination in S305 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether the transition of the lock state is "one-step UP" and the value of the effect state is less than "2" (S307). In S307, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S307 is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination in S307), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is a main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S22 of

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S307 that the determination condition of S307 is satisfied (when the determination in S307 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the effect state (S308). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the effect state is "2" (S309).

  In S309, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not “2” (S309 is NO determination), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game, and the process is a main flow (FIG. 253) Move to S22 of reference). On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S309 that the value of the effect state is "2" (when the determination in step S309 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "2" in the effect state counter (S310). Then, after the processing of S310, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control processing, and shifts the processing to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  Here, the process returns to S303 again, and when the determination in S303 is YES, the main CPU 51 sets the condition that the lock number is "4" and the first stop is the middle reel 3C, or the lock number is "5". It is determined whether or not the condition that the first stop is the right reel 3R is satisfied (S311).

  In S311, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S311 is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination in S311), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is a main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S22 of On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S311 is satisfied in S311 (when the determination of S311 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "2" to the value of the effect state (S312).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the value of the effect state counter (S313). Then, after the processing of S313, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control processing, and shifts the processing to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the bonus operation check process performed in S22 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether "MB" is in operation (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 51 determines that “MB” is not in operation (S321 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S324 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that "MB" is in operation in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether "CB" is in operation (S322). ). In S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that “CB” is in operation (when S322 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process is performed in the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that "CB" is not in operation in S322 (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs CB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 30). (S323). Then, after the processing of S323, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  When the determination in S321 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether the bonus game is a prize (S324). In S324, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is not winning (when the determination in S324 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S328 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is a prize in S324 (when the determination in S324 is YES), the main CPU 51 selects a bonus game that has won based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 30). A corresponding bonus operation process is performed (S325). In this embodiment, in this processing, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 30), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value ("14"). Furthermore, in this process, the process at the time of CB operation described in the above S323 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S326). Next, the main CPU 51 performs bonus start command transmission processing (S327). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by the communication data transmission process (S337) in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 276. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has been started, and the like. Then, after the processing of S327, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  When the determination in S324 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the combination related to replay (replay) is a prize (S328). In S328, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to replay is not a prize (if S328 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S328 that the combination relating to replay is a winning (when the determination in S328 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S329). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S329, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Interrupt process under control of main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 276, interrupt processing performed in a cycle of 1.172 msec under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described. In the interrupt processing described below, the main control circuit 41 performs reel control processing as well as transmission processing of various command data. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs control processing of the variable display operation of the symbol, and doubles as means (data transmission means) for transmitting various command data.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S331). Next, the main CPU 51 performs input port check processing (S332). In this process, the signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs timer update processing (S333). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs, for example, a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer every interrupt process. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 51 clears the game lock flag.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel control processing (S334). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R when required to start the rotation of all the reels, and then rotates each reel at a constant speed, The drive control of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is performed. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and for the corresponding reel. The drive control of the corresponding stepping motor is performed so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the normal acceleration processing, the constant speed processing, and the stop processing described above in the processing of S334, when the reel presentation pattern is set at the acceleration processing, the reel presentation pattern is supported. It also performs control processing of reel effect (reel action) and lock.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the communication data storage area of the main RAM 53, and determines whether there is no transmission data to the sub CPU 81 (sub control circuit 42) (S335). In S335, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is data to be transmitted to the sub CPU 81 (when the determination of S335 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S337 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no transmission data to the sub CPU 81 in S335 (when the determination in S335 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs non-operation command transmission processing (S336). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a data command (not shown) indicating the current input status (input port on / off information) of peripheral devices (for example, start switch, stop switch, etc.) connected to the main control circuit 41. It stores in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 53 as an operation command.

  After the processing of S336, or if S335 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs communication data transmission processing (S337). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits data of various commands stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs lamp 7 segment drive processing (S 338). In this process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs register restoration processing (S339). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt processing.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that various tables necessary for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83 and the like.

[Sub CPU power on process]
First, power-on processing of the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the sub CPU 81 is powered on, a sub CPU initial setting process is executed (S341). In this processing, for example, initialization processing of the sub CPU 81, initialization processing of connected devices (IC (Integrated Circuit), LSI (Large-scale Integration), etc.) initialization processing of a memory (DRAM), OS (Orerating System) The initialization process etc. of are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 makes a start request of the gift control task as a start request of the sub task (S 342). In the power-on process of the sub CPU, when the start command of the product control task is generated from the OS in response to the start request of the product control task by the sub CPU 81, the product control task described in FIG. .

  Next, the sub CPU 81 makes a start request of the lamp control task (S343). Next, the sub CPU 81 makes a start request of the sound control task (S344).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 makes a start request of the main board communication task (S345). In the sub CPU power on process, when the OS issues a start command of the main board communication task from the OS in response to the start request of the main board communication task by the sub CPU 81, the main board communication task described in FIG. .

  Next, the sub CPU 81 issues an animation task activation request (S346). In the power-on process of the sub CPU, when the start command of the animation task is generated from the OS in response to the start request of the animation task by the sub CPU 81, the animation task to be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs backup recovery processing (S347). In this process, the sub CPU 81 uses the various game data (data of the sub game state, the number of remaining ART game games, the number of ceilings, etc.) stored in the SRAM (static RAM) Copy to dynamic RAM). Then, after the process of S347, the sub CPU 81 ends the power on process.

[Sub CPU interrupt processing]
Next, the power interruption interrupt processing of the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is, for example, an interrupt process which is executed when a power-off state, which occurs when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, is detected.

  When power interruption (power supply voltage drop) occurs, the sub CPU 81 performs backup creation processing (S351). In this process, the sub CPU 81 copies various data to be held from the DRAM to the SRAM at the time of power failure detection. That is, the sub CPU 81 performs the reverse process to the backup recovery process (S347 in the power on process) described above. By this process, even if the data is destroyed, the correct data is stored as backup data.

Main board communication task
Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the main board communication task executed by sub CPU 81 will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs reception check of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and acquires command registration data (S361). Next, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S 362). In the present embodiment, command data is composed of 8-byte data, and the first byte of data indicates the type of command.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the command type is a specified type (S363).

  In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of 16 types of codes from "01H" to "10H", and when the game is operating normally, the command type is "01H" to Become one of "10H". Therefore, in the process of S363, if the code of the type of the received command is any one of "01H" to "10H", the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is valid (prescribed type). On the other hand, if the code of the command type is other than “01H” to “10H”, the sub CPU 81 determines that some abnormality (including an injustice) has occurred during the game, and the command type is invalid. judge.

  In S363, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the command is not a prescribed type (when the determination of S 363 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S 361 and repeats the processing of S 361 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 363 that the command type is a predetermined type (if S 363 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command ( S364). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S364, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S361, and repeats the processing of S361 and thereafter.

[Registration registration task]
Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the effect registration task executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 takes out a message from the message queue (S371). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S372). In S372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination is NO in S 372), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 375 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a message in the message queue in S 372 (when the determination in S 372 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies game information from the message (S 373). In this process, for example, various data specified by parameters, such as internal winning combination, type of reel whose rotation has stopped, display combination, gaming state flag, etc., is copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83 Ru.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect content determination processing (S 374). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs determination of effect contents, registration of effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 281 and 282 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers animation data (S 375). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers sound data (S 376). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers lamp data (S377). Then, the sub CPU 81 registers the feature data (S378). In addition, these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S374. After the process of S378, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S371, and repeats the processes after S371.

[Determination content determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 281 and FIG. 282, the effect content determination process performed in S374 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the medal insertion command is received (S381).

  In S381, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the medal insertion command is received (when the determination in S381 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs medal insertion command reception processing (S382). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of determining whether or not the above-described display (winning) command zero has occurred in the previous game, and a corresponding process (measure against Goto) when the display command is zero. The details of the medal insertion command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 283 described later. Then, after the process of S382, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S381 that the medal insertion command is not received (when the determination in S381 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the start command is received (S383).

  In S383, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the start command has been received (when the determination in S 383 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing when a start command is received (S 384). In this process, the sub CPU 81 extracts a random number for effect, and determines and registers an effect number by lottery based on an internal winning combination and the like. Here, the effect number is data for specifying the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the start command according to the registered effect number (S385). The effect data is data designating animation data, sound data, lamp data and feature data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, for example, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as the display of an image is executed. Then, after the process of S385, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S383 that the start command is not received (when the determination in S383 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the reel rotation start command is received (S386).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel rotation start command has been received in S 386 (when the determination in S 386 is YES), the sub CPU 81 responds to the reel rotation start command according to the registered effect number. Data is registered (S387). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S386 that the reel rotation start command is not received (when the determination in S386 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the reel stop command is received (S388).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command has been received in S 388 (when the determination in S 388 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the reel stop command according to the registered effect number and the type of operation stop button. The effect data at the time of reception is registered (S 389). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S388 that the reel stop command is not received (when the determination in S 388 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the display command is received (S390).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S390 that the display command has been received (when the determination in S390 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing in the time of display command reception (S391). The details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 described later. Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the display command in accordance with the registered effect number and display combination (S392). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S390 that the display command is not received (when the determination in S390 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S393).

  In S393, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the payout end command is received (when the determination in S393 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a payout end command reception process (S394). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers effect data for ending the payout. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S393 that the payout end command is not received (S393 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the bonus start command is received (S395).

  In S395, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus start command has been received (when the determination in S 395 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs bonus start command reception processing (S 396). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers effect data for bonus start. Then, after the process of S396, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S395 that the bonus start command has not been received (when the determination in S395 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S397).

  In S397, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus end command has been received (when the determination in S 397 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs bonus end command reception processing (S 398). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers effect data for ending the bonus. Then, after the process of S398, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S397 that the bonus end command has not been received (S397 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a non-operation command has been received (S399). In S399, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the non-operation command has not been received (when S 399 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and the processing is S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 399 that the no-operation command has been received (YES in S 399), the sub CPU 81 saves the input port state of the main CPU 51 in a predetermined storage area in the sub RAM 83. To do (S400). Then, after the process of S400, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

[Process when medal input command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, a medal insertion command reception process performed in S382 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) will be described.

  The sub-control circuit 42 executes the medal insertion command reception process described below. That is, in the present embodiment, the secondary control circuit 42 determines whether or not the display command is received in the previous game when the medal insertion command is received (display command reception determination means), and the display command data is not received. When it is determined, means for performing a predetermined process which should have been performed in the previous game (display command reception process execution means), and when it is determined that display command data has not been received, the predetermined process is performed. It also doubles as a means (game control means) for setting a state in which the right of awarding is lost.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display command has been received in the previous game (S411). That is, at the time of bet operation, sequence error detection processing of a command transmitted from the main CPU 51 to the sub CPU 81 is performed. In S411, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the display command has been received in the previous game (display (winning) command zeroing has not occurred) (when the determination in S 411 is YES), the sub CPU 81 inserts the medal The command reception process ends, and the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) also ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S411 that the sub CPU 81 has received no display command in the previous game (display (winning) command zero occurred) (when S 411 is NO), the sub CPU 81 The state of "1. Navi occurrence of stop operation occurs" is set (S412). When the game at the time of display command zero occurrence is the game of ART or XR mode, even if the game of XRC mode is won by this processing, the winning of XRC mode is forcibly invalidated (described later) In ART processing in FIG. 296 (prize) and in XR processing in FIG. 300 described later (prize).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs processing at the time of display command reception (S413). In other words, if a display (winning) command zero occurs due to a fraudulent act such as a goto in the previous game, the processing at the time of display command reception that should have been performed in the previous game at normal times is forced at this timing. To do. This makes it possible to invalidate the goto action. The details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 described later. Then, after the processing of S413, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of medal insertion command reception, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 281 and 282).

[Process when receiving start command]
A start command reception process performed in S384 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs processing when operating the start lever 16 corresponding to the sub gaming state (S421). In this processing, processing during various sub-playing states described later (for example, processing during normal processing in FIG. 286 described later, processing in ART in FIGS. 291 to 293 described later, and the like) is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs rendering processing such as predetermined navigation (S422). Then, after the processing of S422, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of start command reception, and shifts the processing to S385 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 281 and FIG. 282).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the display command performed in S391 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) and S413 in the flowchart of the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 283). The reception process will be described.

  The sub CPU 81 performs a winning process corresponding to the sub gaming state (S431). In this processing, various sub-playing state (winning) processing (for example, processing during normal (winning) in FIG. 288 described later, ART during processing (winning) in FIG. 296 described later, etc.) described below is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 causes the effect to be executed after the third stop of the stop button (after detecting the OFF edge of the third stop operation) to produce the “pop out” effect (FIG. 15 to FIG. 19) of the central character It is determined whether or not it is the effect described in (S432).

  In S432, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect to be executed after the third stop of the stop button is not the "out" effect of the central character (when S 432 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs processing at the time of display command reception. Is ended, and the process proceeds to S392 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282), or the sub CPU 81 receives a display command reception process from the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 283). In this case, the display command reception process is terminated, and the medal insertion command reception process is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S432 that the effect to be executed after the third stop of the stop button is the “pop out” effect of the central role (when S432 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 controls the center movable A request for confirming whether the movable decorative cover 323 of the unit 105 pops out on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display 11 (the state shown in FIG. 19) (hereinafter referred to as "central character object popping confirmation request") is set (S433). Then, after the processing of S433, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of display command reception, and shifts the processing to S392 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 281 and 282), or the sub CPU 81 performs the processing at the display command reception. Is called from the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 283), the display command reception process is ended, and the medal insertion command reception process is also ended.

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the normal middle processing performed in the normal state will be described.

  In the normal middle processing described below, pseudo bonus lottery processing is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the simulated bonus lottery process is performed in various sub game states, which is limited to the case where the sub game state is the normal state. The pseudo bonus lottery process is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a means (special game determination means) for randomly determining a predetermined pseudo bonus from a plurality of types of pseudo bonus.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S441). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the simulated bonus. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the game number counter.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the transition expectation to the BGZ in the normal state or the ART state changes in accordance with the number of digested games after the end of the simulated bonus. The relationship between the number of digested games and the degree of expectation of transition to BGZ is defined by various BGZ lottery tables determined by lottery using the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 179). Then, when the BGZ lottery is performed with reference to the BGZ lottery table, the number of games counted in the process of S441 is referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number subtraction process (S 442). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 subtracts one from the value of the precursor game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (normal) (S 443). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 69 to 74), the pseudo bonus lottery mode, presence / absence of stock of pseudo bonus (between flags and non flags) and internal winning combination Based on the above, the types of winning and non-winning of the simulated bonus and the simulated bonus upon winning are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the simulated bonus has been won (S444).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has not been won in S 444 (in the case of NO determination in S 444), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 446 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus is won in S 444 (when the determination in S 444 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing (simulated bonus winning time) (S 445). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101) and determines whether or not the XR mode wins based on the simulated bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the simulated bonus. The winning XR winning parameter (1 to 6) is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S445, or if S444 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S446). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is the game of the XR ceiling game number or the game of the simulated bonus ceiling game number, the sub CPU 81 performs a predetermined process at the time of winning XR or winning of the simulated bonus. For example, when the current game is a game with the number of XR ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process or the like performed at the time of winning the XR. Also, for example, if the current game is a game with the number of simulated bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs simulated bonus stock processing, XR lottery processing, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (at normal time) (S447). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (normal) table (see FIG. 84) and determines the presence or absence of winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameter (1 to 6) at winning based on the internal winning combination. Determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (at normal time) (S448). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table (see FIG. 163), and based on the presence or absence of the short lock (game lock of the lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , And the type of BGZ stock (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning or not, and stock of BGZ is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (S449). The pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state when the type of the pseudo bonus won in S443 is the pseudo bonus (don BB, XBB1 or XBB2) of "immediate release".

  In S449, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (when the determination in S 449 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the prognostic game number (proactive game number counter). (S450). Then, after the process of S450, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S456 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the on state in S 449 (when the determination in S 449 is NO), the number of precursor games of the sub CPU 81 is “−1” (cleared ) Is determined (S451).

  In S451, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor game number is not “−1” (when the determination in S 451 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 456 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 451 that the precursor game number is “−1” (when the determination in S 451 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stock is “1” or more. (S452).

  In S452, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stock is not “1” or more (when S 452 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 456 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stock is “1” or more in S 452 (when the determination is “YES” in S 452), the sub CPU 81 performs prognostic game number lottery processing (during normal) (S 453). ). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the prognostic game number random determination (normally) table (see FIG. 238), and based on the stock type to be released (type of stocked game mode), the number of prognostic games (0 ~ 64 games are determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S453, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of precursor games won in S453 (lottery result) is larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (S454).

  In S454, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of prognostic games won in S 453 (lottery result) is larger than the current number of prog games (0 or more) (YES in S 454), the sub CPU 81 performs S 456 described later. Perform the processing of On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games won in S 453 (lottery result) is not larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) in S 454 (in the case of NO determination in S 454), the sub CPU 81 The lottery result is set to the present precursor game number (S455).

  After the processing of S450 or S455, if S451 or S452 is NO, or if S454 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode shift processing (S456). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135), and based on the current value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the internal winning combination, The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (normal) (S457). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 190 to 193), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / not win of the push order navigation and The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (S458).

  In S458, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (when the determination in S 458 is YES), the sub CPU 81 corresponds to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released. The pseudo bonus type is set (S459). By this processing, the game of the pseudo bonus to be released from the next game is started, and the corresponding sub game state processing is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to stock of the simulated bonus to be released (S460). In the present embodiment, the stock of the simulated bonus won at the time of the simulated bonus ceiling game is distinguished from the stock of the simulated bonus won at the time other than the simulated bonus ceiling game (normal time). In the present embodiment, since the immediate release pseudo bonus is won at the time other than the simulated bonus ceiling game (normal time), in the process of S460, “normal” is applied to the stock of the simulated bonus for the release target (immediate release) Information indicating that the game has been won except during the simulated bonus ceiling game (normal time) is set. Then, after the processing of S460, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S458 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the on state (when the determination in S458 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs normal state transition processing (S461). The details of the normal middle state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287 described later. Then, after the processing of S461, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle processing.

[Normal state transition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the normal medium state transition process performed in S461 in the flowchart of the normal medium process (see FIG. 286) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (S471).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 471 that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (in the case of NO determination in S 471), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 482 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 471 that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (when the determination in S 471 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of normal stock to be released is BGZ It is determined whether or not (S472).

  In S472, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the ordinary stock to be discharged is BGZ (when the determination in S 472 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets BGZ in the sub gaming state (S 473). By this processing, the game of BGZ is started from the next game, and the BGZ in-progress processing shown in FIG. 304 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S 473, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be discharged is not BGZ in S 472 (when the determination in S 472 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of the normal stock to be discharged is ART. (S474).

  In S474, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the ordinary stock to be discharged is ART (when the determination in S 474 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparation state to the sub gaming state (S 475). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and an ART preparing process shown in FIG. 289 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S475, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal state transition processing, and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 474 that the type of the normal stock to be discharged is not ART (when the determination in S 474 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of the normal stock to be discharged is a pseudo bonus. It is determined (S476).

  In S476, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be discharged is a pseudo bonus (when the determination in S 476 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the finalized screen state to the sub gaming state (S 477). By this process, the game of the final screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the final screen shown in FIG. 306 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of stock of the simulated bonus to be released, to the simulated bonus type (S 478). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S479). Then, after the processing of S479, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal state transition processing, and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be discharged is not a pseudo bonus in S 476 (when the determination in S 476 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of the normal stock to be discharged is the XR mode It is determined whether or not it is (S480).

  In S480, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be discharged is not the XR mode (when the determination in S 480 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 482 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be discharged is the XR mode in S 480 (when the determination in S 480 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparation state to the sub gaming state (S 481). ). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and an ART preparing process shown in FIG. 289 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S481, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  If S471 or S480 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the normal state (S482). By this processing, the game in the normal state is started again from the next game, and the normal middle processing shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Then, after the processing of S482, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal state transition processing, and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

[Normal processing (winning)]
Next, normal middle processing (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S491).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT 4 gaming state in S 491 (in the case of NO determination in S 491), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 491 that the RT gaming state is the RT 4 gaming state (S 491 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state. (S492).

  In S492, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the ART preparation state (when the determination in S 492 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state in S 492 (if YES in S 492), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S 493). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the in-ART process shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART direct migration flag (S494). The ART direct transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sub gaming state directly shifts from the normal state to the ART state, and when the sub gaming state shifts directly from the normal state to the ART state, the ART direct The transition flag is set to "1". Then, after the processing of S494, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle processing (winning).

[ART preparing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the ART in-provision processing performed in the ART preparation state will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets "1" in the ART flag (S501). The ART flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start the game in the ART state, and when it is determined to start the game in the ART state, "1" is set in the ART flag.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a game count process (S502). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the simulated bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), similarly to the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (S503). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table of simulated bonus lottery (during ART) (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and operates the simulated bonus lottery mode, presence / absence of stock of simulated bonus (between flags and non flags) and internal winning. Based on the role, the types of winning and non-winning pseudo bonus and winning pseudo bonus are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the simulated bonus has been won (S504).

  In S504, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has not been won (when the determination in S 504 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 506 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has been won in S 504 (when the determination in S 504 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stocks the simulated bonus won, and XR lottery processing (simulated bonus winning time). Perform (S505). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101) and determines whether or not the XR mode wins based on the simulated bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the simulated bonus. The winning XR winning parameter (1 to 6) is determined by lottery.

  After the process of S505, or if S504 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a ceiling process (S506). In this process, if the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of simulated bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs the same process as S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), Perform predetermined processing when winning XR or winning a simulated bonus.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing (during ART preparation) (S507). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (during ART preparation) table (see FIG. 87), and based on the internal winning combination, presence or absence of winning in XR mode and XR winning trigger parameter at winning (1 to 6). ) Is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S508). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence or absence of the short lock (game lock of the lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , And the type of BGZ stock (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning or not, and stock of BGZ is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode shift processing (S509). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135), and based on the current value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the internal winning combination, The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation / lottery processing (during ART preparation) (S510). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during ART preparation) table (see FIGS. 234 to 237), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non win of push sequence navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (S511).

  In S511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (in the case of YES determination in S 511), the sub CPU 81 corresponds to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released. The pseudo bonus type is set (S512). By this processing, the game of the pseudo bonus to be released from the next game is started, and the corresponding sub game state processing is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S513). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "1" to the ART return flag (S514). The ART return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the ART state after the game in the pseudo bonus, XR mode or rocket mode is ended, and in the ART state after the game in the pseudo bonus, XR mode or rocket mode is over When returning, the ART return flag is set to "1". Then, after the processing of S514, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART preparation.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus immediate release flag is not in the on state in S 511 (when the determination in S 511 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparation state to the sub gaming state (S 515). As a result of this processing, a game in the ART preparation state is started again from the next game, and an ART preparation processing is performed. Then, after the processing of S515, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART preparation.

[Art preparation process (winning)]
Next, the ART preparing process (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S521).

  In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT 4 gaming state (when the determination in S 521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT 4 gaming state in S 521 (when the determination in S 521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state (S522).

  In S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the ART preparation state (when the determination in S 522 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparing process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S522 that the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state (when the determination in S522 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S523). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the in-ART process shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of XR priority stocks is "1" or more (S524).

  In S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stock is “1” or more (when the determination in S 524 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S527 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S524 that the number of XR priority stocks is not "1" or more (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stocks is "1" or more. (S525).

  In S525, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not “1” or more (S25: NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stock is "1" or more in S525 (when the determination in S525 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal stock priority flag to "1" (S526). ). The normal stock priority flag is a flag indicating whether to release the normal stock to be released prior to the XR preferred stock, and when releasing the normal stock to be released prior to the XR preferred stock, the normal stock priority flag is normally used. The stock priority flag is set to "1".

  After the processing of S526, or if the determination of S524 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (ART transition) (S527). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (see FIGS. 239 to 241), and based on the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition and the stock type of the release target, (0 to 64 games) are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of the precursor game number lottery process (ART transition) to the precursor game number (S528). Then, after the processing of S 528, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing (winning).

[Processing during ART]
Next, the in-ART process performed in the ART state will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S531). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the simulated bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), similarly to the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number subtraction process (S532). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 subtracts one from the value of the precursor game number counter, similarly to the processing of S 442 in the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “immediate return” (S533).

  In S533, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "immediate return" (when S533 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S536 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “immediate return” in S 533 (if S 533 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART initial game number as the ART remaining game number ( S534). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART initial game number (50 games in the present embodiment) in the ART remaining game number counter. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S535).

  After the processing of S535, or if S533 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “precursor return” (S536).

  In S536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "prediction return" (when S536 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S538 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S536 that the ART return type is “precursor return” (when S536 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S537). Then, after the process of S537, or if S536 is NO, the sub CPU 81 subtracts one from the number of remaining ART games (the value of the number of remaining ART games counter) (S538).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR ceiling mode is “0” (S539).

  In S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR ceiling mode is not “0” (when the determination in S 539 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 541 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S539 that the value of the XR ceiling mode is “0” (when the determination in S 539 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling mode shift lottery processing (S 540). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the process of S540, or if S539 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of XR ceiling games is “−1” (ceiling state) (S541). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR ceiling game number counter is “−1”.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR ceiling games is not “−1” (ceiling state) in S 541 (when S 541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 counts the number of XR ceiling games (XR ceiling game number counter 1) is subtracted (S 542). Then, after the process of S542, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S546 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR ceiling games is “−1” (ceiling state) in S 541 (when the determination of S 541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 normally has no stock in the XR mode And, it is determined whether there is no stock in the XR mode in the XR preferred stock (S543).

  In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 543 is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination of S 543), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 546 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 543 is satisfied in S 543 (when the determination in S 543 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling game number lottery processing 1 (S 544). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table (see FIG. 153) and randomly determines the XR ceiling basic game number and the addition value table type based on the current ceiling mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling game number lottery processing 2 (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table (see FIG. 154), and adds an addition value (addition game number) based on the addition value table type (1 or 2) acquired in S464. Determined by lottery. Then, the addition value (additional game number) determined in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 is added to the XR ceiling basic game number determined in the sub XR ceiling game number lottery process 1, and the added value (XR ceiling The basic game number + addition value) is set to the XR ceiling game number (XR ceiling game number counter).

  After the processing of S 542 or S 545, or if S 543 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (during ART) (S 546). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table of simulated bonus lottery (during ART) (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and operates the simulated bonus lottery mode, presence / absence of stock of simulated bonus (between flags and non flags) and internal winning. Based on the role, the types of winning and non-winning pseudo bonus and winning pseudo bonus are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the simulated bonus has been won (S547).

  In S547, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has not been won (when S547 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S549 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has been won in S547 (if YES in S547), the sub CPU 81 stocks the simulated bonus that has been won and XR lottery processing (simulated bonus winning time). Perform (S548). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101) and determines whether or not the XR mode wins based on the simulated bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the simulated bonus. The winning XR winning parameter (1 to 6) is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S548, or if S547 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S549). In this process, if the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of simulated bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs the same process as S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), Perform predetermined processing when winning XR or winning a simulated bonus.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR carnival direct migration lottery process (during ART) (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival direct transition lottery (ART) table (see FIG. 155) and randomly determines winning or non-winning of the XR carnival direct migration based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (during ART) (S551). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 85 and 86), determines whether or not the XR mode wins and the XR win trigger parameter at the win based on the internal winning combination. 6) Determine by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S 552). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence or absence of the short lock (game lock of the lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , And the type of BGZ stock (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning or not, and stock of BGZ is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs rocket mode transition lottery processing (S553). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the rocket mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 160), and based on the internal winning combination, determines the winning / non winning of transition to the rocket mode by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (S 554). The pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state when the type of the pseudo bonus won in S546 is the pseudo bonus (don BB, XBB1 or XBB2) of "immediate release".

  In S554, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (when the determination in S 554 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the prognostic game number (proactive game number counter). (S555). Then, after the process of S555, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S559 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus immediate release flag is not in the on state in S 554 (when S 554 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “navi return”. (S556).

  In S556, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "navi return" (when the determination in S 556 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S559 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S556 that the ART return type is not "Navi return" (when S556 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the precursor game number (the value of the precursor game counter) to "-1. It is determined whether or not it is "cleared" (S557).

  In S557, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor game number is not “−1” (when the determination in S 557 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S559 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S557 that the precursor game number is “−1” (if the determination in S 557 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR release processing (S 558). The details of the XR release process will be described later with reference to FIG. 294 described later.

  After the processing of S 555 or S 558, if S 556 is YES or S 557 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode shift processing (S 559). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135), and based on the current value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the internal winning combination, The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (ART) (S 560). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 194 to 197), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / not win of the push order navigation and The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is "push order bell" (internal winning combination of data pointers 38 to 40), "RT2 transition lip" (internal winning combination of data pointers 32 to 35) and "MB middle role" ( It is determined whether or not any one of the internal winning combinations of the data pointers 32-35 (S561).

  In S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not any of “push order bell”, “RT2 transition rep” and “MB middle role” (S561 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 will be described later. Perform the process of S565. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 561 that the internal winning combination is any of “push order bell”, “RT2 transition lip” and “MB middle role” (when S 561 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 Whether or not the ART return type is "navi return" is determined (S562).

  In S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navi return" (when S 562 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 565 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navi return” in S 562 (when S 562 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the ART remaining game count (ART remaining game count counter value). The ART initial game is set (S563). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S564).

  After the process of S564, or when S561 or S562 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is "0" (S565). The XR carnival direct transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to transition directly to the XRC mode from the ART state without passing through the XR mode, and when it is decided to transition to the XRC mode directly from the ART state, The XR carnival direct transition flag is set to "1".

  In S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “0” (when the determination in S 565 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” in S 565 (when the determination in S 565 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “navi return” It is determined whether or not (S566).

  In S566, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "navi return" (when the determination in S 566 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S566 that the ART return type is not "Navi return" (when S566 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART remaining game number (the value of the ART remaining game number counter) It is determined whether it is 0 "(S567).

  In S567, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not “0” (when the determination in S 567 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of ART remaining games is “0” in S 567 (when the determination of S 567 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor game number (the value of the precursor game counter) is “− It is determined whether or not it is "1" (cleared state) (S568).

  In S568, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor game number is not “−1” (when the determination in S 568 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S568 that the number of precursor games is “−1” (if the determination in S 568 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “0”. It is determined whether or not it is (S569).

  In S569, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the simulated bonus immediate release flag is not "0" (when the determination in S 569 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S569 that the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is "0" (when the determination in S569 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs loop lottery processing at the end of ART (S570). . In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to an ART end loop lottery table (see FIG. 162) and determines an ART return type (including an ART end) by lottery.

  After the process of S570, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of the loop lottery process at the end of ART as the ART return type (S571). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "prediction return" (S572).

  In S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "predictive return" (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the ART return type is “precursor return” (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the stock of ART at the beginning of the normal stock (S573). ).

  After the process of S573, the sub CPU 81 performs a prognostic game number lottery process (at the time of the end of ART) (S574). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the prognostic game number lottery (at the end of ART) table (see FIG. 252) and determines the prognostic game number (0 to 64 games) by lottery based on the stock type to be released. .

  After S574 processing, if S565, S567 to S569 or S572 is NO, or if S566 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “1” (see FIG. S575).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S575 that the value of the simulated bonus immediate release flag is not "1" (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S582 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the simulated bonus immediate release flag is “1” in S 575 (when the determination in S 575 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “navi return” It is determined whether or not (S576).

  In S576, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navi return" (in the case of NO determination in S 576), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S579 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navi return” in S 576 (when S 576 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 determines the ART remaining game count (ART remaining game count counter) The game is set (S577). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S578).

  After the processing of S578, or if S576 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state and the simulated bonus type corresponding to the contents of the normal stock (S579). By this processing, the game in the corresponding sub game state is started from the next game, and the corresponding sub game state processing is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S 580). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the simulated bonus to be released (S581). Then, after the processing of S581, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART.

  Here, returning to S575 again, if S575 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” (S582).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 582 that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “0” (when the determination in S 582 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in ART. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 582 that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” (if YES in S 582), the sub CPU 81 performs state transition processing during ART (S 583). The details of the state transition process during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 295 described later. Then, after the processing of S583, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART.

[Process on XR release]
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the XR release process performed in S558 in the during-ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of XR priority stocks is "1" or more (S591).

  In S591, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is “1” or more (when the determination in S 591 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 594 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that the number of XR priority stocks is not "1" or more (S591 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stocks is "1" or more. It is determined (S592).

  In S592, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stock is not “1” or more (when S 592 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR release processing, and the processing during the ART (FIG. 291) (See FIG. 293)). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stock is “1” or more in S 592 (when the determination in S 592 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the normal stock priority flag (S 593). ).

  After the processing of S593, or when the determination of S591 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a prognostic game number lottery process (during ART, XR end) (S594). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the prognostic game number lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 246 to 248), and based on the remaining ART game number at the time of ART transition and the stock type of the release target (0 to 64 games) are determined by lottery.

  In addition, although the process at the time of XR release shown in FIG. 294 is performed also in the below-mentioned XR in-process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later) and the XRC in-process (see FIG. In S594, the sub CPU 81 refers to the prognostic game number lottery (XR end) table (see FIGS. 249 to 251) and determines the prognostic game number (0 to 64 games) by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of the precursor game number lottery process (during ART, XR end) is larger than the ART remaining game number (S595).

  In S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is not larger than the number of ART remaining games (S595 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the number of lottery results to the number of prognostic games (prognostic game number counter) S596). Then, after the process of S596, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR release process, and moves the process to S559 of the during-ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is larger than the number of remaining ART games in S 595 (when S 595 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the number of remaining ART games as the number of leading games (predictive game counter). It sets (S597). Then, after the process of S597, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR release process, and moves the process to S559 of the during-ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

[ART state transition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 295, the state transition processing during ART performed in S583 in the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (S601).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (when the determination in S 601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 603 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S601 that the value of the counter game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of remaining ART games (the number of remaining ARTs game counter). It is determined whether or not is "0" (S602).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S602 that the number of remaining ART games is not “0” (when the determination in S 602 is “NO”), the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART and the processing during ART (FIGS. See FIG. 293) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S602 that the number of remaining ART games is "0" (when the determination in S602 is YES), or when the determination in S601 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART recovery type is " It is determined whether or not "navigation return" (S603).

  In S603, when it is determined that the ART return type is "navi return" (when S603 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART and the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293). ) Also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S603 that the ART return type is not "navi return" (when S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the normal stock priority flag is "0" ( S604).

  In S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the normal stock priority flag is not "0" (when the determination in S 604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 607 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 604 that the value of the normal stock priority flag is “0” (when the determination in S 604 is “YES”), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the XR priority stock has stock in the XR mode. It is determined (S605).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no stock in the XR mode in the XR priority stock (when the determination in S 605 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 607 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S605 that there is stock of the XR mode in the XR priority stock (if YES in S605), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S606). By this process, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the process during XR shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S606, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  If S604 or S605 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal stock is BGZ (S607).

  In S607, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is BGZ (when the determination in S 607 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets BGZ in the sub gaming state (S 608). By this processing, the game of BGZ is started from the next game, and the BGZ in-progress processing shown in FIG. 304 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S608, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not BGZ in S 607 (when S 607 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal stock is in the XR mode (S 609).

  In S609, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is in the XR mode (when the determination in S 609 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode in the sub gaming state (S610). By this process, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the process during XR shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S610, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not the XR mode in S 609 (when S 609 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal stock is the stock of the pseudo bonus (S 611). . In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not the stock of the pseudo bonus (in the case of NO determination in S 611), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 616 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is the stock of the simulated bonus in S 611 (if the determination in S 611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the finalized screen state to the sub gaming state (S 612). By this process, the game of the final screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the final screen shown in FIG. 306 described later is performed.

  After the process of S612, the sub CPU 81 sets a value corresponding to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released as the pseudo bonus type (S613). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "1" to the ART return flag (S614).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  If S611 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal stock is a rocket mode stock (S616).

  In S616, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is stock in rocket mode (YES in S 616), the sub CPU 81 sets rocket mode in the sub gaming state (S 617). By this process, the game in the rocket mode is started from the next game, and the in-rocket process shown in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S618). Then, after the processing of S 618, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S616 that the normal stock is not the stock in rocket mode (S616 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the normal state (S619). By this processing, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle processing shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Then, after the processing of S619, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

[Process in ART (Prize)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 296, the ART in-progress process (winning) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "navi return" (S621).

  In S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navi return" (when S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S624 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S621 that the ART return type is "navi return" (if S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT4 gaming state. (S622).

  In S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not a state other than the RT 4 gaming state (when the determination in S 622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 624 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is other than the RT 4 gaming state in S 622 (when the determination in S 622 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “immediate return” as the ART return type ( S623).

  After the processing of S623, or if S621 or S622 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (S624).

  In S624, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” (when the determination in S 624 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the in-ART processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” in S 624 (when the determination in S 624 is YES), the sub CPU 81 operates the first stop operation of the stop button by the player. It is determined whether the navigation has been followed (S625).

  In S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation does not follow the navigation (when the determination in S 625 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 633 described later. It should be noted that if display (winning) command zeroing has occurred in the previous game, at this point in time, the state of “navi neglect occurrence of first stop operation” is set as a penalty (FIG. 283 When the medal insertion command is received (see S412), the determination process of S625 is forcibly determined as NO.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S625 that the first stop operation follows the navigation (when the determination in S625 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode to the sub gaming state (S626). By this process, the game in the XRC mode is started from the next game, and the XRC in-progress process shown in FIG. 301 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is an ART recovery type (S627).

  In S627, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no ART return type (when the determination in S 627 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the in-ART process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S627 that there is an ART return type (when S627 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “precursor return” (S628) .

  In S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART recovery type is not "precursor return" (when the determination in S 628 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S632 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “prediction return” in S 628 (when S 628 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is stock of ART in the normal stock. (S629).

  In S629, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no stock of ART in the normal stock (when S629 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S631 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 629 that there is stock of ART in the normal stock (when S 629 is determined as YES), the sub CPU 81 deletes stock of ART from the normal stock (S 630).

  After the process of S630, or if S629 is NO, the sub CPU 81 clears (−1) the prognostic game number (the value of the prognostic game number counter) (S631). Next, after the process of S631, or if S628 is NO, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S632). Then, after the processing of step S632, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART (winning).

  Here, the process returns to S625 again, and if the determination in S625 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs state transition processing during ART described in FIG. 295 (S633). Then, after the process of S633, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART in-progress process (winning).

[Process during XR]
Next, the XR processing performed in the XR mode will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the XR continuation game number (S641). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR continuation game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the simulated bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), similarly to the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (during ART) (S643). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table of simulated bonus lottery (during ART) (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and operates the simulated bonus lottery mode, presence / absence of stock of simulated bonus (between flags and non flags) and internal winning. Based on the role, the types of winning and non-winning pseudo bonus and winning pseudo bonus are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S644). In this process, if the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of simulated bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs the same process as S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), Perform predetermined processing when winning XR or winning a simulated bonus.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the XR continuation game number (the value of the XR continuation game number counter) is “1” (S645).

  In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of continuing XR games is not "1" (when the determination in S 645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S648 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of continuing XR games is “1” in S645 (when the determination in S 645 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR basic G number lottery processing (S 646). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR basic G number lottery table (see FIG. 140 and FIG. 141), and based on the initial XR basic G number and the internal winning combination, the XR basic game number (5, 10, 20 and 30) Determine by lottery. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets this lottery result as the number of XR basic games. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "1" to the combo counter (S647).

  Next, after the processing of S647, or if S645 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs XR carnival direct migration lottery processing (during XR) (S648). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival direct transition lottery (in XR) table (see FIG. 156) and wins the XR carnival direct transition based on the presence or absence of XR carnival reservation (presence or absence of stock in XRC mode).・ Determining non-winning by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR continuation game number (the value of the XR continuation game number counter) is "2" or more (S649).

  In S649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuation games is not 2 or more (when the determination in S 649 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR continuation flag to 1 (S658). The XR continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XR mode game is continued, and when the XR mode game is continued, “1” is set in the XR continuation flag. Then, after the process of S658, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S668 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of continuing XR games is “2” or more in S 649 (when the determination in S 649 is YES), whether the value of the XR carnival winning flag is “0” It is determined whether or not (S650). The XR carnival winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XRC mode is won, and when the XRC mode is won, “1” is set in the XR carnival winning flag.

  In S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is not "0" (when the determination in S 650 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 652 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S650 that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is "0" (when the determination in S 650 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR carnival transition lottery processing (S651). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table (see FIG. 157) and determines winning or non-winning of the XR carnival transition based on the internal winning combination by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs XR continuous lottery processing (S652). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR continuous lottery table (see FIGS. 144 to 150) and continues the XR mode based on the current XR continuous lottery mode and the internal winning combination (rare or other). Determine winnings and not winnings by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR continuous lottery has been won (S653).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR continuous lottery has been won in S 653 (when the determination in S 653 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 659 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S653 that the XR continuous lottery has not been won (S653 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the XR non-continuation flag (S654). The XR non-continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XR continuous lottery has been won, and when the XR continuous lottery is not won, the XR non-continuity flag is set to “1”.

  After the processing of S654, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is "1" (S655).

  In S655, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (when the determination in S 655 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” in S 655 (when the determination in S 655 is NO), the value of the X R carnival winning flag is “1”. It is determined whether or not (S656).

  In S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is "1" (when the determination in S 656 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S659 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is not “1” in S 656 (when the determination in S 656 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” in the XR continuation flag (S 657). . Then, after the process of S657, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S668 described later.

  If S653, S655 or S656 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the XR continuation flag (S659). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the combo counter (S660).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number (S661).

  In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is not the specific combo number (when the determination of S 661 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 663 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number in S 661 (when the determination in S 661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing for the number of games to be added during combo (S 662). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the combo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 143) and randomly determines the number of ART game number addition games (including non-winning games) based on the specific combo number. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets this lottery result as the number of games to be added at the time of combo.

  After the processing of S662 or when the determination of S661 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process of adding the number of games during XR addition (S663). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR addition addition table (see FIG. 142) and randomly determines the number of ART game numbers (including non-winning games) based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds this lottery result to the number of XR middle added games (normal).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number-of-games-addition-addition lottery in XR has been won (S664).

  When it is determined in S664 that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR in-game number addition addition lottery (if S664 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S668 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S664 that the sub CPU 81 wins the XR addition game addition addition lottery (if S664 is a YES determination), that is, if it wins the rare role, the sub CPU 81 matches the value of the combo counter. 1 is added (S665).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number (S666).

  In S666, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is not the specific combo number (in the case of NO determination in S666), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S668 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S666 that the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number (if YES in S666), the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing for the number of games to be added during combo (S667). This process is performed in the same manner as the process of S662. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets this lottery result as the number of games to be added at the time of combo.

  After the processing of S657, S658 or S667, or if S664 or S666 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S668). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence or absence of the short lock (game lock of the lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , And the type of BGZ stock (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning or not, and stock of BGZ is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR continuation flag is “1” or the number of XR continuation games is “1” (S669).

  In S669, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 669 is not satisfied (when the determination of S 669 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 674 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 669 is satisfied in S 669 (if S 669 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 81 adds the number of combo added games to the number of X R super games (total) ( S670).

  After the process of S670, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of XR basic games to the number of XR medium added games (total) (S671). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of XR added games (normal) to the number of XR added games (total) (S672). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the XR middle added game number (total) to the ART remaining game number (S673). In the present embodiment, the number of games is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the addition process of S670 to S673.

  After the processing of S673 or when the determination of S669 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode shift processing (S674). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135), and based on the current value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the internal winning combination, The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR continuation flag is "0" (S675).

  In S675, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is not “0” (when the determination in S 675 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S677 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is “0” in S 675 (when the determination in S 675 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR release process described in FIG. ).

  After the processing of S676, or if S675 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (S677). In this process, when the XR carnival transition flag is in the on state, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (see FIGS. 198 to 201), and the current RT gaming state and the internal Based on the winning combination, the type of winning / not winning of pushing order navigation and pushing order navigation are determined by lottery. The XR carnival transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not transition to the XRC mode is determined, and when transition to the XRC mode is determined, the XR carnival transition flag is set to "1". .

  In the process of S677, when the XR carnival transition flag is in the OFF state and the value of the effect state is "0", the sub CPU 81 selects the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (FIG. 218 and FIG. The type of winning / not winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery with reference to reference 221). In addition, when the XR carnival transition flag is off and the effect state is “1”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (see FIGS. 222 to 225). The type of winning / not winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. In addition, when the XR carnival transition flag is off and the effect state is “2”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (see FIGS. 226 to 229). The type of winning / not winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. Furthermore, when the state of the main control circuit 41 contradicts the state of the sub control circuit 42, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (see FIGS. 226 to 229) and The types of winning, non winning and pushing order navigation in the order navigation are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR carnival transition flag is "1" (S678).

  In S678, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival transition flag is "1" (when the determination in S 678 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode to the sub gaming state (S679). By this process, the game in the XRC mode is started from the next game, and the XRC in-progress process shown in FIG. 301 described later is performed.

  After the processing of S679, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the XR return flag (S680). In addition, the XR return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the XR mode after the end of the XRC mode game, and when returning to the XR mode after the end of the XRC mode game, the XR return flag "1" is set. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the XR carnival winning flag (S681). Then, after the processing of S 681, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival transition flag is not “1” at S 678 (when the determination in S 678 is NO), the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1”. It is determined whether or not (S682).

  In S682, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (when the determination in S 682 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the process during XR. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” at S 682 (when S 682 is NO), whether the value of the X R continuation flag is “0” It is determined whether or not it is (S683).

  In S683, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is not "0" (when the determination in S683 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S684). By this process, the XR mode game is started again from the next game, and the XR in-progress process is performed. Then, after the processing of S684, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S683 that the value of the XR continuation flag is “0” (when the determination in S683 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S685). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and an ART-in-progress process shown in FIGS. Then, after the processing of S685, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-progress processing.

  As described above, in the in-XR process of the present embodiment, winning or non-winning of continuation of the XR mode is determined by lottery (S652), and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a unit (predetermined mode continuation determining unit) which determines continuation of the XR mode by lottery. In addition, in the processing during XR of the present embodiment, the number of basic XR games (the number of first unit games), the number of top XR games (normal) (the number of second unit games), and the combination upon combo according to various triggers. The number of games (third unit number of games) is appropriately added to the number of ART remaining games, and the addition process of these is performed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 adds these various additional game numbers to the number of ART remaining games (a first unit game number addition means, a second unit game number addition means, a third It also doubles as a unit game number incrementing means). Furthermore, in the process during XR of the present embodiment, an addition process (S660 and S665) of the combo number (predetermined addition parameter) is performed, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a means (addition parameter addition means) for adding the combo number.

[Process in XR (Prize)]
Next, referring to FIG. 300, XR in-progress processing (winning) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (S691).

  In S691, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” (when the determination in S 691 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S691 that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (when the determination in S 691 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation of the stop button by the player is It is determined whether the navigation has been followed (S692).

  In S692, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation is not in accordance with the navigation (when the determination in S 692 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process (winning). It should be noted that if display (winning) command zeroing has occurred in the previous game, at this point in time, the state of “navi neglect occurrence of first stop operation” is set as a penalty (FIG. 283 When the medal insertion command is received (see S412), the determination process of S692 is forcibly determined as NO.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S692 that the first stop operation follows the navigation (when the determination in S692 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode to the sub gaming state (S693). By this process, the game in the XRC mode is started from the next game, and the XRC in-progress process shown in FIG. 301 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S694). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the XR carnival winning flag (S695). Then, after the process of S695, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process process (winning).

[Process during XRC]
Next, referring to FIG. 301, XRC in-process processing performed in the XRC mode will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S701). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the simulated bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), similarly to the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (during ART) (S702). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table of simulated bonus lottery (during ART) (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and operates the simulated bonus lottery mode, presence / absence of stock of simulated bonus (between flags and non flags) and internal winning. Based on the role, the types of winning and non-winning pseudo bonus and winning pseudo bonus are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S703). In this process, if the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of simulated bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs the same process as S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), Perform predetermined processing when winning XR or winning a simulated bonus.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S704). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence or absence of the short lock (game lock of the lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , And the type of BGZ stock (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning or not, and stock of BGZ is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XRC continuation flag is 1 or the value of the XRC start flag is 1 (S705). Note that the XRC continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not to continue the XRC mode, and when the continuation game lock lottery process (S94, S97 in FIG. 258) is won and the continuation of the XRC mode is determined, The XRC continuation flag is set to "1". The XRC start flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start the XRC mode, and when the XRC mode is set to the sub gaming state (for example, S693 in FIG. 300), the XRC start flag Is set to "1".

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 705 is not satisfied in S 705 (when S 705 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 708 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 705 that the determination condition of S 705 is satisfied (when the determination in S 705 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs lottery process 1 for number-of-extra-games in XR carnival (S 706). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival addition top one lottery table (see FIG. 158) and determines the number of ART top games by lottery based on the number of locks. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of XRC added games (stop).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing of the number of added games during XR carnival 2 (S 707). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table (see FIG. 159) and randomly determines the number of ART additional games based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of XRC added games (lever).

  After the process of S707, or if S705 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode shift processing (S708). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135), and based on the current value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the internal winning combination, The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (carnival transition) (S709). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (see FIGS. 198 to 201), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non hit of the push order navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of XRC medium addition games (stop) to the number of ART remaining games (S 710). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the XRC middle added game number (lever) to the ART remaining game number (S711).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XRC end flag is "2" (S712). In addition, the XRC end flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game in the XRC mode is ended, and it is out of the continuous game lock lottery process (S94, S97 in FIG. 258) (continuous lottery was not winning In the case of 2), the XRC end flag is set to “2”.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 712 that the value of the XRC end flag is not “2” (when the determination in S 712 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 715 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 712 that the value of the XRC end flag is “2” (when the determination in S 712 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR return flag is “0”. It is determined (S713).

  In S713, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is not “0” (when the determination in S 713 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 715 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is “0” in S 713 (when the determination in S 713 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR release processing described in FIG. ).

  After the process of S714, or if S712 or S713 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XRC end flag is "2" (S715).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 715 that the value of the XRC end flag is not “2” (S 715 is NO), that is, when the XRC mode is continued, the sub CPU 81 enters the sub gaming state XRC mode. Is set (S716). By this process, the game of the XRC mode is started again from the next game, and the process during the XRC is performed. Then, after the processing of S716, the sub CPU 81 ends the XRC in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is “2” in S 715 (when the determination in S 715 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR recovery flag is “1”. It is determined (S717).

  In S717, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is not "1" (when the determination in S 717 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S 718). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and an ART-in-progress process shown in FIGS. Then, after the processing of S718, the sub CPU 81 ends the XRC in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S717 that the value of the XR return flag is "1" (when the determination in S717 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S719). By this process, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the process during XR shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 is performed. Then, after the processing of S719, the sub CPU 81 ends the XRC in-progress processing.

  As described above, in the XRC processing of the present embodiment, the number of games added to various XRCs is added to the number of ART remaining games (S710 and S711), and the addition processing of these is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a unit (a first addition unit and a second addition unit) that performs various addition processing of the number of ART games performed in the XRC processing.

[Process during rocket]
Next, with reference to FIG. 302 and FIG. 303, the in-rocket process performed in the rocket mode will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S721). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the simulated bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), similarly to the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is "1" (S722). The rocket mode continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game in the rocket mode is continued after the game in the rocket mode for a predetermined period (50 games in the present embodiment) ends. Then, when the game in the rocket mode is continued (for example, in the case of the 50 game rocket mode game, the simulated bonus is not won), “1” is set in the rocket mode continuation flag. The rocket mode continuation flag is set in rocket mode continuation lottery in S734 described later.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 722 that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is not “1” (when the determination in S 722 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 725 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 722 that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1” (when the determination in S 722 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the rocket mode initial game number as the rocket mode remaining number. It sets (S723). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode initial game number to the rocket mode remaining game number counter. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the rocket mode continuation flag (S 724).

  After the processing of S724, or if S722 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the rocket mode remaining game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) is "1" or more (S725).

  In S725, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the rocket mode remaining game number is not “1” or more (when the determination in S 725 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 728 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining rocket mode games is “1” or more in S 725 (if the determination in S 725 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether MB is in operation (S S726).

  In S726, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MB is in operation (when the determination in S 726 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S728 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 726 that the MB is not in operation (S 726 is NO), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the rocket mode remaining game number (the rocket mode remaining game number counter) ( S727).

  After the processing of S727, if S725 is NO or S726 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode to "3" (S728). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (rocket mode) (S729). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (during rocket) table (see FIG. 83), and randomly selects the types of pseudo bonus winning / not winning and winning pseudo bonus based on the internal winning combination. decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the simulated bonus has been won (S730).

  In S730, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has not been won (when S 730 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 732 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus has been won in S 730 (if the determination in S 730 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing (simulated bonus winning time) (S 731). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (simulated bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101), and determines whether or not the XR mode wins based on the simulated bonus lottery mode and the simulated bonus winning classification. The time XR winning parameter (1 to 6) is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S731, or if S730 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S732). In this process, if the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of simulated bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs the same process as S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), Perform predetermined processing when winning XR or winning a simulated bonus.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the rocket mode remaining game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) is “0” (S733).

  In S733, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the rocket mode remaining game number is not "0" (when the determination in S 733 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 735 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S733 that the rocket mode remaining game number is “0” (when the determination in S 733 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs rocket mode continuous lottery processing (S 734). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the rocket mode continued lottery table (see FIG. 161) and determines continuation / end of the rocket mode by lottery based on the stock status of the pseudo bonus. When the rocket mode continuous lottery is won, the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode continuation flag to “1”.

  After the processing of S734, or if S733 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (ART) (S735). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 194 to 197), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / not win of the push order navigation and The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the rocket mode remaining game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) is “0” (S 736).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S736 that the rocket mode remaining game number is not "0" (when the determination in S736 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode to the sub gaming state (S737). By this processing, the game in the rocket mode is started again from the next game, and the processing during the rocket is performed. Then, after the processing of S737, the sub CPU 81 ends the rocket in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining rocket mode games is “0” in S 736 (when the determination in S 736 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1”. It is determined whether or not (S738).

  In S738, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1” (when the determination in S 738 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode to the sub gaming state (S 739). By this processing, the game in the rocket mode is started again from the next game, and the processing during the rocket is performed. Then, after the processing of S739, the sub CPU 81 ends the rocket in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 738 that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is not “1” (S 738 returns NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode. (S740). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a 1G continuous stock (S741).

  In S741, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no 1G continuous stock (S741 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S742). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and an ART-in-progress process shown in FIGS. Then, after the processing of S742, the sub CPU 81 ends the rocket in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a 1G continuous stock in S 741 (if the determination in S 741 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the finalized screen state to the sub gaming state (S 743). By this process, the game of the final screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the final screen shown in FIG. 306 described later is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of stock of the pseudo bonus to be released to the pseudo bonus type (S744).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1G-run” in the stock of the simulated bonus to be released (S 745). Then, after the processing of S745, the sub CPU 81 ends the rocket in-progress processing.

[Process during BGZ]
Next, the processing during BGZ performed in BGZ will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than “0” (S751).

  In S751, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not larger than “0” (when the determination in S 751 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 754 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S751 that the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than “0” (when the determination in S 751 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs BG challenge content lottery processing (S 752). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BG challenge content lottery table (see FIGS. 180 and 181), and corrects the BG challenge (or alternative effect) based on the value of BG challenge mode and the internal winning combination. The content of the incorrect answer is determined by lottery. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the BG challenge mode (S753).

  After the processing of S753 or when the determination of S751 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BGZ extension flag is in the on state (S754). The BGZ extension flag is set to the on state when the BG challenge is won in the seventh game of BGZ, that is, when the BG challenge is performed in the eighth game.

  In S754, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BGZ extension flag is in the on state (when the determination in S 754 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S759 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 754 that the BGZ extension flag is not in the on state (S 754 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs BG challenge mode transition lottery processing (S 755). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BG challenge mode transition table (see FIGS. 182 to 189) and randomly determines the BG challenge mode of the transition destination based on the current BGZ mode, the internal winning combination, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a "push order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S756).

  In S756, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is "push order bell" (when S 756 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 81 selects the winning result of BG challenge mode transition lottery and the BG challenge mode (bell winning ) (S757). In the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is "push order bell", the BG challenge mode transition table is not referred to in the BG challenge mode transition lottery process of S755. Therefore, in the present embodiment, BG challenge mode 0 is set to BG challenge mode (for bell winning) in S757. Then, after the process of S757, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S759 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the “push order bell” in S 756 (when S 756 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the winning result of BG challenge mode shift lottery in the BG challenge mode. (S758).

  After the processing of S757 or S758, or when the determination of S754 is YES, the sub CPU 81 clears the BGZ extension flag (S759).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation occurrence lottery processing (BGZ mode 2) (S760). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (see FIGS. 230 to 233), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non win of push order navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of remaining BGZ games is “0” (S 761). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BGZ remaining game number counter is “0”. The BGZ remaining game number counter is set to the initial value “7” when the BGZ mode is set to the sub gaming state (for example, S608 in FIG. 295), and then the BGZ remaining game is set for each BGZ mode game. The value of the number counter is decremented by one.

  In S 761, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BGZ remaining game number is not “0” (when the determination in S 761 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 761 that the BGZ remaining game number is “0” (when the determination in S 761 is “YES”), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of BG challenge mode is larger than “0”. (S762).

  In S762, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than “0” (when the determination in S 762 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BGZ extension flag (S 763). Then, after the processing of S763, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not larger than “0” in S 762 (when the determination in S 762 is NO), the sub CPU 81 restores the sub gaming state to the predetermined sub gaming state (S764).

  Specifically, when the BGZ is the normal middle BGZ, in S764, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the normal state. By this processing, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle processing shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Further, if BGZ is BGZ in ART, in S764, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state. By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and an ART-in-progress process shown in FIGS. If there is a stock of XR, the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state in S764. By this process, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the process during XR shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 is performed.

  Then, after the processing of S794, the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ in-progress processing.

[Process in BGZ (at winning)]
Next, the BGZ middle (at the time of winning) processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 internally wins the "push order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) and determines whether or not the "push order bell" is won (S771).

  In S771, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 771 is satisfied (when the determination in S 771 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the BG challenge mode (for bell winning) to the BG challenge mode (S 772). Then, after the process of S772, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S774 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S771 that the determination condition of S771 is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination in S771), the sub CPU 81 clears the BG challenge mode (for bell winning) (S773).

  After the processing of S772 or S773, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BGZ remaining game number (the value of the BGZ remaining game number counter) is “0” (S774).

  In S774, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining BGZ games is not “0” (when the determination in S774 is NO), the processing of S778 described later is performed. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BGZ remaining game number is “0” in S 774 (when the determination in S 774 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BG challenge mode value is larger than “0”. (S775).

  In S775, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not larger than “0” (when the determination in S 775 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S778 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S775 that the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than “0” (if YES in S775), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BGZ extension flag (S776).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets BGZ to the sub gaming state (S777). By this processing, the BGZ game is started again from the next game, and the BGZ in-progress processing shown in FIG. 304 is performed.

  After the processing of S777, or if S774 or S775 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BG challenge has succeeded (S778).

  In S778, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BG challenge has not succeeded (when S778 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ (at the time of winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S778 that the BG challenge has succeeded (when the determination in S 778 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether ART is in operation (S 779).

  In S779, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART is in operation (when the determination in S 779 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 781 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S779 that the ART is not in operation (S779: NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparing state to the sub gaming state (S780). By this processing, a game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and an ART preparation processing shown in FIG. 289 is performed.

  After the processing of S780, or if S779 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing when the BG challenge is successful (S781). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table (see FIG. 105), and based on the success parameter, presence or absence of XR mode winning and XR winning opportunity parameter at winning (1 to 6). ) Is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling mode transition lottery processing (S 782). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs XR content lottery processing when the BG challenge is successful (S783). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139) and extracts the number of XR basic games and the XR continuation rate in the XR mode by lottery based on the value of the XR winning parameter acquired in S781. decide. Then, after the processing of S783, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ (at the time of winning).

  As described above, in the processing during BGZ (at the time of winning) of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the BG challenge has succeeded (S778), and this determination processing is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as means (specific condition determination means) for determining whether or not the BG challenge has succeeded. Further, in the BGZ during (winning) process of the present embodiment, when the BG challenge is successful, a privilege (ART and / or XR mode) is given in the process of S780 and S781 described above. Is executed by That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a means (reward grant means) for granting a privilege when the BG challenge is successful.

[Process in decision screen]
Next, with reference to FIG. 306, an in-determination-screen process performed in the finalized screen state will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery processing (during the finalization screen) (S791). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table of simulated bonus lottery (in the finalization screen) (see FIG. 81) and based on the internal winning combination, sorts out the types of simulated bonus winning / non winning and simulated bonus at winning. Determined by

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (during the confirmation screen) (S792). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (in the finalization screen) table (see FIG. 88), and based on the internal winning combination, presence or absence of winning in the XR mode and XR winning trigger parameter at winning (1 to 6). ) Is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (S793). In this process, if the type of the simulated bonus won is “RB”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table (see FIGS. 202 to 205), and the RT gaming state and the internal Based on the winning combination, the type of winning / not winning of pushing order navigation and pushing order navigation are determined by lottery. If the type of the simulated bonus won is “Red 7 · Don BB”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (Red 7 · Don BB transition) table (see FIGS. 206 to 209), and RT Based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination, it is determined by lottery the type of winning · not winning of the push order navigation and push order navigation. Further, if the type of the simulated bonus won is “XBB”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (see FIGS. 210 to 213), and plays the RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning / not winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (S794).

  In S794, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the on state (when the determination in S 794 is YES), the sub CPU 81 corresponds to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released. The pseudo bonus type is set (S795). By this processing, the game of the corresponding simulated bonus is started from the next game, and the corresponding sub game state processing is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the decision screen return flag (S796). The finalized screen return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the finalized screen state after the end of the pseudo bonus, and when the finalized bonus state returns to the finalized screen state, the finalized screen return flag is “1”. Is set. Then, after the process of S796, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during finalized screen.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus immediate release flag is not in the on state in S 794 (when the determination in S 794 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the finalized screen state to the sub gaming state (S 797). By this process, the game of the final screen state is started again from the next game, and the final screen process is performed. Then, after the process of S 797, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during finalized screen.

[Process in fixed screen (Prize)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the process (winning) in the confirmation screen will be described.

  It should be noted that, in the processing during the finalization screen (winning) described below, the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “1”, and the right reel 3R is first stopped. In this case, regardless of the type of the "immediate release" pseudo bonus which has been won, the BB mode pseudo bonus is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 sets the pseudo bonus of the BB mode as the sub gaming state regardless of the type of the "immediate release" pseudo bonus which has been won in the specific case (special game (special game Control means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT3 gaming state (S801).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S801 that the RT gaming state has not shifted to the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S806 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT 3 gaming state in S 801 (when the determination in S 801 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the sub gaming state is the finalized screen state. (S802).

  In S802, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the determined screen state (in the case of NO determination in S802), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing (winning) in the determined screen. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 802 that the sub gaming state is the finalized screen state (when the determination in S 802 is YES), the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag of the sub CPU 81 is “1”, and It is determined whether the stop button on which the first stop operation has been performed is the right stop button 17R (S803).

  In S803, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 803 is satisfied (when S 803 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets a pseudo bonus of BB mode (Don BB or Red 7 BB) in the sub gaming state ( S804). By this processing, the pseudo bonus game in the BB mode is started from the next game, and the processing during BB shown in FIG. 308 described later is performed. Then, after the process of S804, the sub CPU 81 ends the process (winning) in the finalized screen. In addition, if the SBB is a YES judgment in a state in which the XBB mode pseudo bonus of “immediate release” is won, that is, the order of pressing the stop button (game characteristics at the time of winning the XBB mode pseudo bonus of “immediate release” ) Is substantially ignored, the processing of S804 destroys the right to obtain the XBB mode as a penalty.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 803 that the determination condition of S 803 is not satisfied (S 803 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets a predetermined sub gaming state according to the pseudo bonus type (S 805) . By this processing, the game of the simulated bonus of the type set from the next game is started, and the corresponding sub-gaming state processing is performed. Then, after the process of S805, the sub CPU 81 ends the process (winning) in the finalized screen.

  Here, the process returns to S801 again, and if S801 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the generated push order navigation is the "medium 1st navigation" defined in the push order navigation lottery table ( S806). In S806, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pushing order navigation is not the "medium 1st navigation" (when the determination in S 806 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process (winning) in the on-screen state.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pushing order navigation is "medium 1st navigation" in S 806 (in the case of YES determination in S 806), the sub CPU 81 is a simulated bonus of BB mode (Don BB) in sub gaming state Is set (S807). By this processing, the pseudo bonus game in the BB mode is started from the next game, and the processing during BB shown in FIG. 308 described later is performed. Then, after the process of S 807, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the determined screen (winning).

  It should be noted that if YES is determined in S806, as described above, since the state fraud occurred due to navigation neglect at the time of winning the simulated bonus, regardless of the type of the simulated bonus won, in the process of S807, the sub gaming state To the state of BB (Don BB) mode. Therefore, even if the pseudo bonus of the XBB mode is won, the right to obtain the XBB mode disappears by the processing of S807 if the push order navigation of the "middle 1st navigation" is ignored.

[Processing during BB]
Next, the mid-BB process performed in the BB mode will be described with reference to FIG. The processing during BB described below is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the secondary control circuit 42 is a means for performing operation control of a simulated bonus game in the BB mode (first special game state) performed in the RT3 gaming state (predetermined replay time state) (first special Game control means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 subtracts one from the value of the BB remaining game number counter (S811). The initial value (60 games in the present embodiment) of the BB remaining game number counter is set when the sub gaming state is set to the BB mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs setting processing of the don match mode (S812). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB XR lottery game number table (see FIGS. 106 to 108), and based on the value of the BB remaining game number counter and the currently set don match mode map number. , Don match mode (1 to 9) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “Don match” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 23) (S813).

  In S813, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not a "don't match" (if S813 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S815 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S813 that the internal winning combination is "Don match" (if S813 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a don match permission flag lottery process (S814). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB match permission flag table (refer to FIGS. 111 to 119) and determines the current don match lottery mode and the type of “don match” winning internally (lower match, upper match). On the basis of the diagonal alignment or middle alignment, permission / not permission (on / off of the don alignment permission flag) of the stop display of the don alignment symbol combination is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S814, or if S813 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing during BB (S815). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (in BB) table (see FIGS. 89 to 97), and based on the don match mode and the internal winning combination, the presence or absence of winning in the XR mode and the XR win at winning. Trigger parameters (1 to 6) are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (during a simulated bonus) (S816). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non hit of the push order navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BB remaining game number counter is “0” (S817).

  In S817, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BB remaining game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S 817 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BB.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BB remaining game number counter is “0” in S 817 (when S 817 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end standby state to the sub gaming state. (S818). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started from the next game, and the process during the pseudo bonus end waiting shown in FIG. 312 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S 818, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BB.

[Process during NRB]
Next, NRB in-progress processing performed in the NRB mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S 821). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the lottery process by adding the number of times of the bell navigation during NRB (S822). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB in-navi addition lottery table (see FIG. 123) and randomly determines the number of bell navigation additions (including non-wins) based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs setting processing of the XR lottery mode during RB (S823). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB during XR lottery game number table (see FIG. 109), and based on the value of the RB during XR lottery game number counter and the currently set RB among XR lottery table modes. Then, the XR lottery mode (0 to 10) in RB is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a mandatory game number mandatory shift lottery process during NRB (S 824). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB forced shortening lottery table (see FIG. 124), and determines winning or non-winning of NRB forced shortening by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub-CPU 81 determines whether or not the NRB prescribed game number forced shift lottery of S 824 has been won (S 825).

  When it is determined in S825 that the sub CPU 81 has not won the NRB prescribed game number forced shift lottery (when S825 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S827 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 825 that the NRB during mandatory game number forced migration lottery has been won (when S 825 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 sets “10” to the X R lottery mode during RB ( S826). In this embodiment, when the NRB in-game defined game number forced transition lottery is won, the value of the in-RB XR lottery mode is forcibly forced at that point, even if the in-RB XR lottery mode is a value other than “10”. It is set to "10".

  After the processing of S826, or if S825 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is "10" (S827). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of staying games in the NRB mode has reached the specified number of games.

  In S827, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is not “10” (when the determination in S 827 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 835 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is “10” in S 827 (when the determination in S 827 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process when the NRB prescribed game is achieved. (S828). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery table (when the specified game is achieved during NRB) (see FIG. 102) and randomly extracts the presence or absence of the XR mode win and the XR win trigger parameter (1 to 6) at the win. decide.

  After the processing of S 828, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the NRB prescribed game has been won (S 829).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 829 that the NRB during the NRB middle defined game achievement is not won (when S 829 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 835 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 829 that the XR lottery at the time when the specified game is achieved during NRB is won (if S 829 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling mode transition lottery processing (S 830). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the processing of S 830, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S 831). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR content lottery process when the NRB prescribed game is achieved (S 832). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139), and based on the value (1 to 6) of the XR winning parameter acquired in S828, the XR basic game count and the XR in XR mode. The continuation rate is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing of the ART lottery game number table at SRB start time (S833). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART lottery game number table at the start of SRB table lottery table (see FIG. 132), and randomly selects table numbers (1 to 28) based on the transition to SRB mode. Then, after the process of S833, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S834).

  After the processing of S834, or if S827 or S829 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (during a simulated bonus) (S835). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non hit of the push order navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a "push order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S836).

  In S 836, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the “push order bell” (when the determination in S 836 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB in-progress processing. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is "push order bell" in S 836 (if S 836 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the navigation remaining counter in RB (S 837). ). In addition, the RB inside navigation remaining counter is a counter for managing the number of bell navigations which is the termination condition of the game in the RB (NRB and SRB) mode, and the initial value of the RB inside navigation remaining counter is RB in the sub gaming state. It is set when the NRB and SRB) modes are set.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the in-RB navigation remaining counter is “0” (S838).

  In S838, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the in-RB navigation remaining counter is "0" (when the determination in S 838 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end standby state to the sub gaming state ( S839). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started from the next game, and the process during the pseudo bonus end waiting shown in FIG. 312 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S839, the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines in S 838 that the value of the navigation remaining in RB counter is not “0” (S 838 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART recovery flag is on (1). It is determined whether or not it is set (S840).

  In S840, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return flag is not in the on state (when S 840 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 840 that the ART return flag is in the on state (YES in S 840), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the SRB mode (S 841). By this process, the game in the SRB mode is started from the next game, and the process during SRB shown in FIG. 310 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S841, the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB in-progress processing.

  As described above, in the NRB-in-progress process of the present embodiment, additional lottery of the number of times of bell navigation is performed for each game, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a means (lottery number increase lottery means) for performing an increase lottery of the number of bell navigations. Further, in the NRB processing of this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games), a benefit (XR mode) is given, and this processing is performed by the sub control circuit 42. To be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the NRB mode, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a means (reward grant means) for granting a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the NRB processing of this embodiment, the number of bell navigations is counted, and it is determined whether to end the pseudo bonus based on the number of bell navigations (value of navigation remaining counter in RB). Then, these processes are executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as means for counting the number of bell navigations (counting number of notification times) and means for ending the simulated bonus (specific gaming state ending means) based on the number of bell navigations.

[Process during SRB]
Next, referring to FIG. 310, SRB in-progress processing performed in the SRB mode will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S 851). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs setting processing of the XR lottery mode in RB (S 852). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB-in-XR lottery game number table (see FIG. 110), and based on the value of the RB-in-XR lottery game number counter and the currently-set RB in XR lottery table mode. Then, the XR lottery mode (0 to 7) in RB is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an ART game number addition lottery process (S853). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 125 to 131), and based on the value of the XR lottery mode in RB and the internal winning combination, the number of ART game numbers To determine winning)) by lottery.

  In this embodiment, in the number of digested games in the SRB mode in which the RB XR lottery mode is “2” to “6”, the number of ART games is set to be easily obtained. For example, if the number of digested games from the start of the SRB mode game is 4 (specific game number) and the RB XR lottery table mode is “1”, the RB XR lottery mode is “6” ( In this case, additions of 5 games or more are always determined in roles other than the role associated with “don't match” (see FIG. 130). That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games (the number of staying games) from the start of gaming in the SRB mode reaches the specific number of games, it becomes easy to obtain the addition of the number of ART games.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is “7” (S 854). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of staying games in the SRB mode has reached the specified number of games.

  In S854, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is not “7” (when the determination in S 854 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S861 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is “7” in S 854 (when the determination in S 854 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process when the defined game is achieved during SRB. (S855). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the specified game during SRB is achieved) table (see FIG. 103) and randomly extracts the presence or absence of the XR mode win and the XR win trigger parameter (1 to 6) at the win. decide.

  After the processing of S 855, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the SRB-specified game has been won (S 856).

  In S856, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR lottery at the time of achieving the SRB middle definition game is not won (when S 856 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 861 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 856 that the XR lottery at the time of achieving the SRB middle game is achieved (S 856 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling mode shift lottery processing (S 857). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the process of S857, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR content lottery process when the SRB prescribed game is achieved (S858). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139), and based on the value (1 to 6) of the XR winning parameter acquired in S855, the XR basic game count and the XR in XR mode. The continuation rate is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing of the ART lottery game number table at SRB start time (S 859). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART lottery game number table at the start of SRB table lottery table (see FIG. 132), and randomly selects table numbers (1 to 28) based on the transition to SRB mode. Then, after the process of S859, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S860).

  After the processing of S860, or if S854 or S856 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (during a simulated bonus) (S861). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non hit of the push order navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a "push order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S862).

  In S 862, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell” (S 622 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the SRB in-progress process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is "push order bell" in S 862 (if S 862 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the navigation remaining counter in RB (S 863). ). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the in-RB navigation remaining counter is “0” (S 864).

  In S864, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the in-RB navigation remaining counter is not "0" (when the determination in S 864 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the SRB in-progress processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the navigation remaining in RB counter is “0” in S 864 (when the determination of S 864 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end standby state to the sub gaming state. (S865). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started from the next game, and the process during the pseudo bonus end waiting shown in FIG. 312 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S865, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during SRB.

  As described above, in the SRB-in-progress process of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games or the number of specified games), the benefit (winning in XR mode or number of ART games) Is applied, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, in the SRB mode, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a unit (a privilege giving unit) for giving a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Process during XBB]
Next, the XBB in-progress processing performed in the XBB mode will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control circuit 42 executes the XBB in-progress process described below. That is, in the present embodiment, the secondary control circuit 42 is a means for performing operation control of the simulated bonus game in the XBB mode (second special game state) performed in the RT3 gaming state (predetermined replay time state) (second special (second special) Game control means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (S871). In this process, if it is determined that the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT3 gaming state (state fraud), as described above, it is determined that start command zeroing has occurred due to fraud. .

  In S871, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S871 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S883, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 871 that the RT gaming state is not other than the RT 3 gaming state (S 871 is NO), the internal CPU winning combination is “don't match fail rip” (toll numbers 17 to 19). It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination of ") or" Don match lip "(internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 23) (S872).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 872 is not satisfied in S 872 (when the determination of S 872 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 880 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 872 that the determination condition of S 872 is satisfied (when the determination in S 872 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XBB continuous lottery processing (S 873). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB continuation lottery table (see FIG. 120) and based on the internal winning combination, extracts the type (1 or 2) of continuation parameters for winning and not winning and winning of XBB. Determined by

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XBB continuous lottery has been won (S874).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB continuous lottery has not been won in S 874 (when the determination in S 874 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 881 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 874 that the XBB continuous lottery has been won (when the determination of S 874 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XBB stock lottery processing during XBB (S 875). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB continuation time XBB stock table (see FIG. 121) and determines whether or not the XBB mode stock is winning based on the type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuation win time flag (continuation parameter). Not winning is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S 875, the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing during XBB continuation (S 876). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (at XBB continuation) table (see FIG. 104), and based on the type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuation win time flag (continuation parameter), Determined by lottery. Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XBB lottery has been continued during the XBB continuation (S877).

  When it is determined in S877 that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR lottery during XBB continuation (when the determination in S877 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S881 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S877 that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery during XBB continuation (when the determination in S877 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR ceiling mode transition lottery processing (S878). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the processing of S878, the sub CPU 81 performs XR content lottery processing (S879). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139) and extracts the number of XR basic games and the XR continuation rate in the XR mode by lottery based on the value of the XR winning parameter acquired in S876. decide. Then, after the process of S879, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S881 described later.

  Here, the process returns to S 872 again, and if S 872 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs continuous stock lottery processing (normal) during XBB (S 880). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the continuous stock lottery (normal) table in the XBB (see FIG. 122), and determines the stock number (including non-winning) in the XBB mode by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  After the processing of S879 or S880, or if S874 or S877 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation occurrence lottery processing (during a simulated bonus) (S881). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during a simulated bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination, win / non hit of the push order navigation. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether to continue the XBB mode (S 882).

  In S882, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB mode is to be continued (when the determination in S 882 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XBB.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB mode is not continued in S 882 (if S 882 is NO determination) or if S 871 is YES determination, the sub CPU 81 substitutes the BB mode pseudo bonus into the sub gaming state. Set (S883). By this processing, the pseudo bonus game in the BB mode is started from the next game, and the processing during BB shown in FIG. 308 is performed. Then, after the process of S883, the sub CPU 81 ends the XBB in-process.

  In the process of S883, which is performed when S871 is determined as YES, that is, when it is determined that start command zeroing has occurred due to a fraudulent action, the sub CPU 81 uses the sub gaming state as a penalty from the simulated bonus of XBB mode as a penalty. Force transition to BB mode fake bonus. By this processing, the gaming right in the XBB mode disappears, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent an illegal addition during the XBB mode. In addition, in the process of S893 performed when S871 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 does not shift the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Therefore, in this case, the processing during BB is performed in the RT gaming state other than the RT3 gaming state.

[Process while waiting for simulated bonus end]
Next, with reference to FIG. 312, a pseudo bonus end waiting process performed in the pseudo bonus end waiting state will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the ART return flag is “1” (is in the on state) (S891).

  In S891, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART return flag is not “1” (in the case of NO determination in S 891), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 893 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S891 that the value of the ART return flag is "1" (when the determination of S891 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "1" in the ART flag (S892).

  After the processing of S892 or when the determination of S891 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (during a pseudo bonus end waiting) (S893). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table of simulated bonus lottery (during waiting for simulated bonus termination) table (see FIG. 82) and randomly selects the types of winning and not winning of the simulated bonus and the simulated bonus based on the internal winning combination. decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the simulated bonus lottery has been won (S894).

  In S894, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus lottery has not been won (in the case of NO determination in S 894), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 896 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the simulated bonus lottery has been won in S 894 (when the determination in S 894 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the finalized screen return flag (S 895).

  After the processing of S895, or if S894 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs XR lottery processing (during pseudo bonus waiting) (S896). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (during waiting for pseudo bonus termination) table (see FIG. 98) and determines winning / non winning and XR winning opportunity parameters in the XR mode by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Do.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs push order navigation generation lottery processing (S897). In this process, if the value of the ART return flag is “1”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 194 to 197), and determines the current RT gaming state and internal winning combination. The type of winning / not winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. If the value of the ART return flag is “0”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 190 to 193), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. Thus, the type of winning / not winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. Then, after the processing of S897, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing while waiting for the end of the simulated bonus.

[Simulation bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) processing (winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 313, processing (winning) in the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) during the pseudo bonus in the BB mode, NRB mode or SRB mode will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus end standby state (at the time of pseudo bonus end) (S901). In S901, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the pseudo bonus end standby state (S901 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing (winning) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) Do.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus end standby state at S 901 (when the determination at S 901 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing at the time of pseudo bonus end (at winning) (S 902). ). The details of the processing at the time of the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 314 described later. Then, after the processing of S902, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing (winning) in the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB).

[Process at the end of simulated bonus (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 314, processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) will be described. It is to be noted that the processing at the time of the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) is a process also called at S902 in the processing (winning) (see FIG. 313) during the simulated bonus (BB / NRB / SRB).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (S911). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state irregularity (inconsistency of the RT gaming state) has occurred.

  In S911, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not other than the RT3 gaming state (when S 911 is NO), that is, when the state fraud is not generated, the sub CPU 81 simulates the sub gaming state simulated bonus The end waiting state is set (S912). By this processing, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started again from the next game, and the processing during the pseudo bonus end waiting shown in FIG. 312 is performed. Then, after the processing of S912, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning). If the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) is called from the processing (winning) during the simulated bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 performs the simulated bonus after the processing of S912. The end of time (at the time of winning) process is ended, and the processing (winning) of the process during pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) is also ended.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S911 that the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S 911 is YES), that is, in the case where the state fraud has occurred, the sub CPU 81 performs S913 described later. After that, processing at the time of winning in the bonus end waiting state is performed. In this process, even if the RT gaming state is changed to a non-normal state (when pushing order navigation is ignored), the regular sub gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state is set (sub gaming state Return to normal condition). Although not shown, when the determination in S 911 is YES, the sub CPU 81 also performs a process of setting 20 games in the normal penalty counter as a penalty process.

  If the determination in S911 is YES, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the finalized screen return flag is in the on state (S913).

  In S913, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the finalized screen return flag is in the on state (when S 913 is determined as YES), the sub CPU 81 determines a value indicating the type of stock of the pseudo bonus to be released, the pseudo bonus The type is set (S914). After the processing of S914, the sub CPU 81 sets the finalized screen state to the sub gaming state (S915). By this process, the game of the final screen state is started from the next game, and the final screen process shown in FIG. 306 is performed. Then, after the processing of S 915, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning). If the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) is called from the processing (winning) during the simulated bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 performs the simulated bonus after the processing of S915. The end of time (at the time of winning) process is ended, and the processing (winning) of the process during pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) is also ended.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 913 that the finalized screen return flag is not in the on state (S 913 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery transition processing (when pseudo bonus ends) (S 916). . In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table (see FIGS. 136 to 138) for transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode (at the time of pseudo bonus end), and the current pseudo bonus lottery mode and pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end). The type of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transfer destination is determined by lottery based on the above.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ lottery game number table lottery processing (when the simulated bonus is ended) (S917). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 179), and based on the previous BGZ lottery game number table and the pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end), BGZ lottery table numbers (1 to 15) are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return flag is in the on state (S918).

  In S918, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return flag is not in the on state (when the determination in S 918 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 924 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S918 that the ART return flag is in the on state (when the determination in S 918 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S919). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and an ART-in-progress process shown in FIGS.

  After the processing of S919, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of XR priority stocks is larger than "0" (S920).

  In S920, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is larger than “0” (when the determination in S 920 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 923 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S920 that the number of XR priority stocks is not larger than “0” (when the determination in S 920 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stocks is larger than “0”. It is determined (S921).

  In S921, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not larger than “0” (when the determination in S 921 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 923 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stock is larger than “0” (in the case of YES in S 921), the sub CPU 81 turns on the normal stock priority flag (S 922).

  After the processing of S922, if the determination of S920 is YES, or if the determination of S921 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a leading game number lottery process (S923). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the prognostic game number random determination (simulated bonus end) table (see FIGS. 242 to 245), and based on the stock type to be released, extracts the prognostic game number (0 to 64 games). Determined by Then, after the processing of S923, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning). If the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) is called from the processing (winning) during the simulated bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 performs the simulated bonus after the processing of S923. The end of time (at the time of winning) process is ended, and the processing (winning) of the process during pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) is also ended.

  Here, again, returning to S918, if S918 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the normal state (S924). By this processing, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle processing shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Then, after the processing of S924, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning). If the processing at the end of the simulated bonus (at the time of winning) is called from the processing (winning) during the simulated bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 performs the simulated bonus after the processing of S924. The end of time (at the time of winning) process is ended, and the processing (winning) of the process during pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) is also ended.

[Item control task]
Next, referring to FIG. 315, a gift control task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described. In the feature control task, control of rendering operation of the central movable unit 105 (central combination), the left movable unit 106 (left door combination), and the right movable unit 107 (right door combination) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the accessory control task is repeated in a cycle of 10 msec including the processing time. In the case of directly controlling the movable part by the sub CPU 81, the part control task is executed in a cycle of 1 msec to the minimum value (3 msec) of the pulse width of the part movable data.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a feature start test process (S 931). In this process, the sub CPU 81 checks the operation of each movable combination at power-on, and checks whether each movable combination has returned to the home position (initial position) at the end of the operation check sequence. Note that details of the bonus game activation test process will be described later with reference to FIG. 316 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a registered (set) role data (S932). The feature data is registered in the sub RAM 83 in the effect registration task shown in FIG.

  In S932, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is the registered character data (when the determination in S 932 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S934 described later. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines in S932 that there is no registered item data (if the determination in S 932 is NO), whether the sub CPU 81 stores a call sign for moving an item in the call sign storage area It is determined whether or not (S933).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when “out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is performed after detection of the OFF edge of the third stop operation, the first in the effect sequence data displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the next game. In the predetermined image frame from the detection of the OFF edge of the third stop operation to the end of the game, a call symbol for storing a central product storage instruction is associated with the central product storage instruction (linked). Therefore, in the case where the central item storage storage designated call sign for storing the central combination storage instruction is stored in the call sign storage area as the character movable item call sign, the process of S933 is determined as YES.

  In S933, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 does not store a call sign for moving the item (for example, a call sign for storing a designated part for storing a central combination product storage instruction, etc.) in the call sign storage area (S933: NO determination ), The sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S935 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S933 that the sub CPU 81 stores the data for moving a character object in the call sign storage area (in the case of YES determination in S933) or in the case of YES determination in S932, the sub CPU 81 The character movement data corresponding to the character data or the character movement call sign is acquired (S934).

  In the process of S934, for example, character movable data for effect drive for central movable unit 105 (hereinafter referred to as central character movable data), character movable data for effect for left movable unit 106 (hereinafter referred to as left door role) Object movable data (hereinafter referred to as object movable data) and effect movable data for effect drive of the right movable unit 107 (hereinafter referred to as right door character movable data) are acquired. If the effect of the central movable unit 105 is a “jump out” effect, in the processing of S934, the character movement data (hereinafter referred to as central product pop out data) for the “jump out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is It is acquired. Further, in the case where a call sign for specifying the central character product storage instruction is stored in the call sign storage area, the central movable unit 105 (movable decorative cover 323) is set at the origin position (initial position) in the processing of S934. Character movement data (hereinafter referred to as central character accommodation data) for the storage operation to be returned to) is acquired.

  After the process of S934, or if S933 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory control process (S935). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs an output process of the accessory movable data to the movable unit drive circuit and a monitoring process of the operation status of the movable accessory to be controlled. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive control of the stepping motor of each movable part is performed by the corresponding movable unit drive circuit (a character control board). The details of the part control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 318 described later. Then, after the process of S935, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S932, and repeats the processes after S932.

[Product start test processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the bonus item activation test process performed in S931 in the bonus item control task (see FIG. 315) will be described. In this embodiment, the activation test of the movable part is simultaneously performed on the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107 by parallel processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the activation test for each movable part may be sequentially performed in units of one unit.

  Note that the accessory activation test process described below is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a means (starting time operation confirmation means) for checking the movement operation of various movable roles at the time of activation and detecting whether an error occurs in various movable objects. . Further, in the accessory activation test process described below, when an error of the movable accessory occurs at activation, error occurrence information of the movable accessory is registered in the error information history. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as means (error registration means) for registering the error occurrence information of the movable part at the time of activation in the error history information.

  First, the sub CPU 81 acquires bonus item movement data for a bonus item activation test (S941). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 acquires the prize movable data (application pattern data of the excitation pulse) of the "start test" column in the prize movable data table of each movable prize shown in FIG. 13 and FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a character control data output process (S942). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs the movable role object data acquired in S941 to the corresponding movable unit drive circuit (character object control board) by serial communication. When the sub CPU 81 directly drives and controls the movable part, in the process of S 942, the sub CPU 81 determines the part in the “start test” column in the part movable data table shown in FIGS. 13 and 20. Movable data is directly output to the movable part. This process starts the activation test of each movable part.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus item movable state update process of a predetermined movable bonus item (S943). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 updates the predetermined movable part position information based on the count number of the excitation pulses applied to the predetermined movable part, etc. Then, predetermined drive control corresponding to the start test is performed. In the activation test for each movable combination, each movable combination is driven and controlled in an operation pattern such that each movable combination finally returns to the home position.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the activation test for all the movable roles has been completed (S944). In S944, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the activation test for all the movable roles is not completed (when the determination in S 944 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S 943 and repeats the processing of S 943 and subsequent steps.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S944 that the activation test for all the movable roles is finished (when the determination in S 944 is YES), the sub CPU 81 detects that the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is on. It is determined whether or not there is any (whether or not the right door 189 has returned to the origin position) (S945).

  In S945, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the right door combination product origin sensor is not in the on state (when the determination in S 945 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S948 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S945 that the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is in the on state (when S945 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 81 detects the detection result of the left door combination object origin sensor It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (whether or not the left door 188 has returned to the home position) (S946).

  In S946, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door combination product origin sensor is not in the on state (when the determination in S 946 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S948 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S946 that the detection result of the left door combination object origin sensor is in the on state (when S946 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 detects that the detection result of the central object origin sensor is on. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (whether or not the movable decorative cover 323 has returned to the origin position) (S947).

  In S947, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is not in the on state (when the determination in S 947 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S948 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S947 that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is in the on state (when the determination in S 947 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus item activation test process and performs the process. Move to S932 in the gift control task (see FIG. 315).

  If S945, S946 or S947 is NO, that is, if the movable part has not finally returned to the home position in the start-up test, the sub CPU 81 indicates that an error of the movable part has occurred ("YAKUMONO" ERR ") is registered in the error information history (S948).

  Here, FIG. 317 shows a configuration example of an error information history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. The error information history screen is displayed when the error information history is selected in the simple menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by turning the door key counterclockwise. As shown in FIG. 317, in the error information history, various types of error information are displayed in chronological order, and each error information includes information such as error content and occurrence date and time. Further, in the error information history, not only the error information of the movable part, but also various information such as a power failure ("POWER DOWN") and a power failure recovery ("POWER UP") are recorded.

  Then, after the process of S948, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus item activation test process, and shifts the process to S932 in the bonus item control task (see FIG. 315). As described above, in the present embodiment, when a movable combination error occurs in the activation test of the movable combination, the common error occurrence information (“YAKUMONO ERR”) is an error regardless of the type of the movable combination. Register in the information history. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different error occurrence information may be defined for each type of movable part, and the error occurrence information of each movable part may be separately registered in the error information history. In this case, it is possible to easily identify the type of movable part in which an error has occurred.

[Item control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the item control processing performed in S935 in the flowchart of the item control task (see FIG. 315) will be described.

  In the accessory control process described below, when the accessory movable data is set for a predetermined movable accessory, the accessory movable data is output to the predetermined movable accessory. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as means (control data output means) for outputting the item movable data (control data) to the movable part. Further, in the accessory control process described below, when an error of the movable combination occurs at the start operation of five games in succession, the driving of the movable combination is prohibited. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 prohibits the driving of the movable combination when the occurrence of an error of the movable combination is detected continuously during the start operation over five unit games ( It also serves as a driving prohibition means). In addition, in the accessory control processing described below, the above-described special processing performed when the next game is started while the central movable unit 105 produces a "jump out" effect is also executed (S951 to S957 and S962 described later) . That is, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started while the central movable unit 105 produces the "popout" effect, the sub control circuit 42 performs the "popout" effect of the central movable unit 105 at the start operation of the next game. Means (first movement control data output means) for outputting to the central movable unit 105 the accessory movable data for moving the central moving unit 105 for returning the central movable unit 105 to the origin position after the effect of "jump out" It also doubles as means for outputting to the movable unit 105 (second movement control data output means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the start command has been received and the central combination pop-out confirmation request has been set (S951).

  In S951, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 951 is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination of S 951), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 954 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 951 is satisfied in S 951 (in the case of YES determination in S 951), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is on. (S952).

  In S952, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is not in the on state (when the determination in S952 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S954 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is in the on state in S 952 (when the determination of S 952 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets central combination pop out data to combination movable data. (First movement control data) is registered (S953). Then, after the process of S953, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S962, which will be described later.

  If S951 or S952 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a registered (set) role data (S954). The feature data is registered in the sub RAM 83 in the effect registration task shown in FIG.

  In S954, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is the character data (when the determination in S954 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S958 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no character data in S 954 (if S 954 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command is received, or the central character storage instruction is specified. It is determined whether or not the bonus product storage call sign is stored in the call sign storage area (S955).

  In S955, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 955 is not satisfied (when the determination of S 955 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 963 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 955 is satisfied in S 955 (if the determination in S 955 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the central movable unit 105 based on information (position information) related to the bonus item movable state. It is determined whether or not the movable decorative cover 323 (central product) has popped out to the front of the liquid crystal screen (S956).

  In S956, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the movable decorative cover 323 (central product) is not in the state of popping out to the front of the liquid crystal screen (when S956 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S963 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S956 that the movable decorative cover 323 (central product) pops out to the front of the liquid crystal screen (when the determination of S 956 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the character movable data The central combination storage data (second movement control data) is registered in (S957). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the application pattern data of the excitation pulse defined in the “Storing” column in the central combination product movement data table shown in FIG. 20 as the combination product movement data. Then, after the process of S957, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S962, which will be described later.

  Here, the process returns to S954 again, and if S954 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the right door accessory error counter is “5” or more, or the value of the left door accessory error counter is It is determined whether or not "5" or more (S958).

  In S958, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 958 is not satisfied (when the determination of S 958 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S 960 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S 958 is satisfied in S 958 (if YES in S 958), the sub CPU 81 deletes the left door role object movable data and the right door role object movable data (S 959). ). That is, when an error occurs at the start operation continuously five times (five games) or more in the left movable unit 106 (left door character) or the right movable unit 107 (right door character), the process of S959 The driving of the left movable unit 106 (left door part) and the right movable unit 107 (right door part) are prohibited.

  After the process of S959, or if S958 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the central combination error counter is "5" or more (S960).

  In S960, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the central character error counter is not “5” or more (when the determination in S 960 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S962 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 960 that the value of the central prize error counter is “5” or more (when the determination in S 960 is YES), the sub CPU 81 deletes the central prize movable data (S 961). ). That is, when an error occurs at the start operation five times (five games) or more continuously in the central movable unit 105 (central combination), the processing of S961 is performed to drive the central movable unit 105 (central combination). Is prohibited.

  After the processing of S953, S957, or S961, or if S960 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a gift control data output process (S962). In this process, the sub CPU 81 serially outputs the movable article driving data (character article control board) corresponding to the movable article driving data registered for each movable commercial article. In the case where the sub CPU 81 directly controls driving of the movable combination, the sub CPU 81 directly outputs combination movable data to the movable combination in the process of S 962.

  After the process of S962 or when S955 or S956 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus game operation monitoring process (S963). Note that the details of the bonus game operation monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 319 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus item movable state update process (S 964). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 updates the position information of each movable part based on the count number of the excitation pulse and the like. Further, when the detection result of the movable combination object origin sensor is in the on state, the sub CPU 81 resets the position information of the corresponding movable combination object to the origin position (initial position). Then, after the processing of S964, the sub CPU 81 ends the gift control processing, and shifts the processing to S932 in the gift control task (see FIG. 315).

[Product operation monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the bonus item operation monitoring process performed in S963 in the flowchart of the bonus item control process (see FIG. 318) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is time to receive a start command (S971).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S971 that the start command has not been received (when the determination in S971 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S973 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S971 that the start command has been received (when the determination in S971 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus game operation start monitoring process (S972). The details of the bonus game operation start monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321 described later.

  After the process of S972, or if S971 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the bonus item movable state is the operation end state (S973). In S973, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the character movable state is not the operation end state (when S 973 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the character movement monitoring process and performs the character body control process ( Move to S964 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S973 that the character movable state is the operation end state (when the determination in S 973 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a character article operation end monitoring process (S 974). The details of the bonus game operation end monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 322 described later. Then, after the process of S974, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation monitoring process, and shifts the process to S964 in the bonus game control process (see FIG. 318).

[Product operation start monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321, the bonus item operation start monitoring process performed in S972 in the flowchart of the bonus item operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319) will be described.

  Note that the accessory operation start monitoring process described below is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 checks the operating conditions of various movable roles at the time of start operation of the game and detects whether or not errors of the various movable objects are occurring (operation check at start time) Means). In the bonus game operation start monitoring process described below, when an error occurs in the movable game during the start operation of five games in a row, the drive prohibition information of the movable game is registered in the error information history. . That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as means (error registration means) for registering the drive prohibition information of the movable part in the error history information.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the detection result of the central product origin sensor is in the off state (S 981).

  In S981, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is not in the off state (when the determination in S 981 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the central combination error counter to "0". (S982). Then, after the process of S982, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S986 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 981 that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is in the off state (when the determination in S 981 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the central combination error counter is “5”. It is determined whether it is less than (S983). In S983, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the central character error counter is not less than 5 (when the determination in S 983 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 986 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 983 that the value of the central combination error counter is less than “5” (when the determination in S 983 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the central combination error counter is “1”. Is added (S984). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the central combination error counter is "5" or more (S985).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S 985 that the value of the central character error counter is “5” or more (when the determination in S 985 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 996 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S 985 that the value of the central character error counter is not “5” or more (when the determination in S 985 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 986 described later.

  After the process of S982 or when S983 or S985 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the detection result of the right door combination product origin sensor is in the OFF state (S986).

  In S986, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the right door combination product origin sensor is not in the off state (when the determination in S986 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the value of the right door combination product error counter. Set (S987). Then, after the process of S987, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S991 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S986 that the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is in the off state (when the determination in S986 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door combination product error counter is “ It is determined whether it is less than 5 "(S988). In S988, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door role product error counter is not less than 5 (when the determination in S988 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S991 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S988 that the value of the right door prize product error counter is less than "5" (when the determination in S988 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the right door prize product error counter. "1" is added (S989). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the right door product error counter is "5" or more (S990).

  In S990, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door combination product error counter is "5" or more (when the determination in S 990 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S996 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S990 that the value of the right door role product error counter is not “5” or more (when the determination in S 990 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 991 described later.

  After the processing of S987, or if S988 or S990 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the detection result of the left door combination product origin sensor is in the OFF state (S991).

  In S991, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door combination product origin sensor is not in the off state (when S991 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the value of the left door combination product error counter. Set (S992). Then, after the process of S992, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation start monitoring process, and shifts the process to S973 in the bonus game operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door combination object origin sensor is in the OFF state in S 991 (when the determination in S 991 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door combination object error counter is “ It is determined whether it is less than 5 "(S993). In S993, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door product error counter is not less than 5 (when the determination in S 993 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation start monitoring process and performs the process. The process moves to S973 in the gift operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S993 that the value of the left door product error counter is less than “5” (when the determination in S 993 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the left door product error counter to "1" is added (S994). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the left door product error counter is “5” or more (S995).

  In S995, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door product error counter is “5” or more (when the determination in S 995 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S996 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S995 that the value of the left door product error counter is not "5" or more (when the determination in S995 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation start monitoring process. The processing moves to S973 in the bonus game operation monitoring processing (see FIG. 319).

  If S985, S990 or S995 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 registers the character article error stop information (“YAKUMONO STOP”) in the error information history (see FIG. 317) (S996). That is, when an error occurs in the movable combination during the start operation of five games in a row, the drive prohibition information of the movable combination is registered in the error information history. After the process of S996, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation start monitoring process, and shifts the process to S973 in the bonus game operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  In the error information history registration process, even if an error occurs in the movable combination during the start operation continuously for six games or more, the combination error stop information (drive prohibition information) of the movable combination is added to the error information history. Not registered Further, in the present embodiment, for example, after the part error stop information of the central part is registered in the error information history, the part error stop information of the right movable part or the left movable part is registered in the error information history In some cases. In such a case, common item error stop information ("YAKUMONO STOP") is registered in the error information history regardless of the type of movable part in any registration process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate item error stop information (drive prohibition information) is defined for each type of movable item, and the item error stop information of each movable item separately is an error information history. It may be configured to be registered in In this case, it is possible to easily identify the type of the movable part that is inhibited from driving.

[Item operation end monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the bonus item operation end monitoring process performed in S974 in the flowchart of the bonus item operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319) will be described.

  In addition, in the bonus item movement end monitoring processing described below, when the predetermined movable combination has not returned to the origin position at the end of the effect, the origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the predetermined movable combination to the origin position Is output to a predetermined movable role. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as means (origin return control data output means) for outputting origin return assist data (origin return assist control data) to the movable part.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the right door combination product movement data is combination movement data to finally return the right door 189 to the original position (initial position) (S1001).

  In S1001, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right door combination product movement data is not the combination product movement data for finally returning the right door 189 to the origin position (when S1001 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs S1005 described later. Perform the processing of On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1001 that the right door combination object movable data is the combination movable object data for finally returning the right door 189 to the origin position (when S1001 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 Whether or not the position of the right door 189 is the home position is determined based on the information (position information) of the accessory movable state of the right movable unit 107 (S1002).

  In S1002, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the right door 189 is not the origin position (when the determination in S1002 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1005 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the right door 189 is the origin position in S 1002 (when the determination in S 1002 is YES), the sub CPU 81 detects that the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is off. It is determined whether or not it is (S1003).

  In S1003, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the right door combination product origin sensor is not in the off state (when the determination in S1003 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1005 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1003 that the detection result of the right door combination object origin sensor is in the off state (when the determination in S1003 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs right door combination origin return auxiliary data output processing (S1004). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs, to the right movable unit drive circuit 98, auxiliary character origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the right door 189 to the home position (initial position). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 outputs, to the right movable unit drive circuit 98, accessory movable data such that the right door 189 rotationally moves by 60 excitation pulses in the direction toward the origin position (closing direction). Do. Then, after the process of S1004, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1005 described later.

  After the processing of S1004, or when S1001, S1002 or S1003 is NO, the sub CPU 81 is the combination movable data in which the left door combination movable data finally returns the left door 188 to the origin position (initial position). It is determined whether or not (S1005).

  In S1005, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left door part product movement data is not the part movement data for finally returning the left door 188 to the original position (when S1005 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs S1009 described later. Perform the processing of On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1005 that the left door combination object movable data is the combination movable object data for finally returning the left door 188 to the origin position (when S1005 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 Whether or not the position of the left door 188 is the home position is determined based on the information (position information) of the accessory movable state of the left movable unit 106 (S1006).

  In S1006, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the left door 188 is not the origin position (when S1006 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1009 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the left door 188 is the origin position in S 1006 (when S 1006 is determined as YES), the sub CPU 81 detects that the detection result of the left door combination object origin sensor is off. It is determined whether or not (S1007).

  In S1007, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door combination product origin sensor is not in the off state (when the determination in S1007 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1009 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1007 that the detection result of the left door combination object origin sensor is in the off state (when the determination in S1007 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs left door combination origin return auxiliary data output processing (S1008). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs, to the left movable unit drive circuit 97, auxiliary character origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the left door 188 to the home position (initial position). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 outputs, to the left movable unit drive circuit 97, accessory movable data such that the left door 188 rotationally moves by 60 excitation pulses in the direction toward the origin position (closing direction). Do. Then, after the process of S1008, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1009 described later.

  After the process of S1008, or if S1005, S1006 or S1007 is NO, the sub CPU 81 plays the role of returning the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 to the home position (initial position) finally. It is determined whether it is object movable data (S1009).

  In S1009, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the central character movement data is not the character movement data for finally returning the movable decorative cover 323 to the origin position (when S1009 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the character movement When the end monitoring process is ended, the bonus game operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319) is also ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1009 that the central combination product movable data is the combination movable data for finally returning the movable decorative cover 323 to the origin position (when S1009 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 Whether or not the position of the movable decorative cover 323 (central combination) is the origin position is determined based on the information (position information) of the item movable state of the central movable unit 105 (S1010).

  In S1010, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the movable decorative cover 323 is not the origin position (when the determination in S 1010 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation end monitoring process and the bonus game operation monitoring process. (See FIG. 319) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1010 that the position of the movable decorative cover 323 is the origin position (when the determination in S1010 is YES), the sub CPU 81 detects that the detection result of the central object origin sensor is off. It is determined whether or not it is (S1011).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1011 that the detection result of the central combination product origin sensor is not in the off state (when the determination in S1011 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus item operation end monitoring process and The monitoring process (see FIG. 319) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1011 that the detection result of the central combination object origin sensor is in the off state (when S1011 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 performs central combination origin return auxiliary data output processing (S1012). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs, to the central movable unit drive circuit 96, a feature origin return assist data for forcibly returning the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 to the original position (initial position). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 outputs, to the central movable unit drive circuit 96, accessory movable data such that the movable decorative cover 323 moves by 115 excitation pulses in the direction toward the home position (storage direction). Do. Then, after the process of S1012, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus game operation end monitoring process and also ends the bonus game operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

[Anime task]
Next, with reference to FIG. 323, an animation task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described. In the animation task, operation control of various image display effects by the liquid crystal display device 11 is performed.

  In the animation task described below, the sub control circuit 42 detects a character sign storage call sign and stores it in the call sign storage area. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 doubles as a unit (movement command information storage unit) that detects the character storage call sign for central product storage instruction designation and stores it in the call sign storage area.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of taking out animation data registered (set) in the sub RAM 83 (S 1021). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not animation data is registered (S1022).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the animation data is not registered in S 1022 (when the determination in S 1022 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S 1024 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that animation data is registered in S 1022 (when the determination in S 1022 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs effect setting processing (S 1023). In this process, the sub CPU 81 acquires image (moving image) data (rendering pattern sequence data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and sets the image data in a rendering sequence management area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. Do.

  After the processing of S1023, or if S1022 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs effect sequence update processing (S1024). In the process of S1024, the sub CPU 81 updates the effect timeline, and changes the start position of the effect sequence to a position corresponding to the received command when various events occur (when various commands are received).

  Further, in the process of S1024, when there is a call sign for moving the bonus product associated with the image frame of the rendering sequence data in the current rendering timeline, the sub CPU 81 detects the call sign for moving the bonus product And store (set) in the call sign storage area. In the present embodiment, for example, when the character frame for the character combination storage designation is associated with the image frame of the current production timeline as the character movable sign for the character article, the process of S1024 is performed. In the case of the central character article storage instruction specification, the detection process of the character article storage call sign and the storage process in the call sign storage area are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs guide menu main processing (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs operation control of display / non-display of a guide menu (see FIG. 14) in the liquid crystal display device 11. The details of the guide menu main process will be described later with reference to FIG. 324 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs billy touch input processing (S1026). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the player has performed a press operation (touch input) on the left effect switch 22L or the right effect switch 22R, and the type of effect switch input by touch. Perform discrimination processing etc.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs animation processing (S1027). In this processing, for example, the sub CPU 81 performs 2D animation processing (reproduction control processing of moving image data), 3D animation processing (display control of various effects displayed three-dimensionally), and the like. Then, after the process of S1027, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S1021, and repeats the processes after S1021.

[Guide menu main processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the guide menu main processing performed in S1025 in the flowchart of the animation task (see FIG. 323) will be described.

  The guide menu main process described below is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, when the specific control by the player is detected during non-game, the sub control circuit 42 displays guidance information (various types of information such as a payout table and various menus) relating to the game content to the liquid crystal display device 11. It also doubles as means for displaying information (guidance information display means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a game is in progress (S1031). In S1031, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is in progress (when the determination in S 1031 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main processing and shifts the processing to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323) . On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1031 that the game is not in progress (S1031 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the guide menu (see FIG. 14) is being displayed (S1032) .

  In S1032, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the guide menu is being displayed (when the determination in S1032 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1037 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1032 that the guide menu is not being displayed (S1032 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the player has pressed the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B. It discriminates (S1033).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1033 that the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B is not pressed (when the determination in S1033 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main processing, and the processing is an animation task (see FIG. Move to S1026 in (see 323). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B has been pressed in S1033 (when the determination in S1033 is YES), the sub CPU 81 detects the left door role object origin sensor and the right door role object origin sensor Status information (on or off) is acquired (S1034).

  After the process of S1034, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection results of the left door combination product origin sensor and the right door combination product origin sensor are in the on state (S1035). In S1035, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection results of the left door role product origin sensor and the right door role object origin sensor are not in the on state (when S 1035 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main processing Then, the process proceeds to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323). That is, when the player presses the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B (when the player performs a guide menu display operation), the respective doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are at the origin position. If it has not returned (when the door part is in operation), the guide menu is not displayed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1035 that the detection results of the left door combination product origin sensor and the right door combination product origin sensor are in the ON state (in the case of YES determination in S1035), the sub CPU 81 selects A display request is made (S1036). That is, when the player presses the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B (when the player performs a guide menu display operation), the respective doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are at the origin position. If it is back, the guide menu is displayed. Then, after the processing of S1036, the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main processing, and shifts the processing to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323).

  Here, the process returns to S1032 again, and if the determination of S1032 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a guide menu process corresponding to the operation of the player (S1037). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the end condition of the guide menu is satisfied (S1038). In the present embodiment, the ending condition of the guide menu is satisfied when a bet operation, a lever operation (start operation), or a selection operation of “return to game” is performed on the screen of the guide menu.

  In S1038, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the end condition of the guide menu is not satisfied (S1038 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main processing, and the processing is an animation task (see FIG. 323). Move to S1026 in). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1038 that the end condition of the guide menu is satisfied (when the determination in S1038 is YES), the sub CPU 81 requests the end of the guide menu (S1039). Then, after the processing of S1039, the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main processing, and shifts the processing to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323).

  The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above including the effects and advantages thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and includes various embodiments and modifications without departing from the scope of the present invention described in the claims. In the above embodiment, the pachislot machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and similar effects are obtained. can get.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi slot (game machine), 2 ... exterior body, 2a ... cabinet, 2b ... front door, 3L ... left reel, 3C ... middle reel, 3R ... right reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... display window, 11 ... liquid crystal display Device, 16 start lever, 17L, left stop button, 17C, middle stop button, 17R, right stop button, 19A, SELECT button, 19B, ENTER button, 22L, 22R, presentation switch, 41, main control circuit, 42 ... secondary control circuit, 50 ... microcomputer, 51 ... main CPU, 52 ... main ROM, 53 ... main RAM, 56 ... random number generator, 81 ... sub CPU, 82 ... sub ROM, 83 ... sub RAM, 105 ... central movable Unit 106: left movable unit 107: right movable unit 188: left door 189: right door 302: decoration Dynamic member, 323 ... movable decorative cover, 324 ... arch cover

Claims (4)

A control unit that performs control relating to the production of a game;
A display device for displaying an image;
A movable decorative portion which is disposed so as to be superimposed on a part of the player's side of the display screen of the display device and which performs a predetermined movement operation;
Operation means for receiving an operation of the player;
The control unit has control means for determining an effect of the game and controlling an operation of the determined effect.
The movable decorative portion has position detection means for detecting the position of the movable decorative portion by one or more sensors,
The control means
Start-up operation check means for checking the operation of the movable decorative portion when the control unit is started;
Guidance information display means capable of displaying guidance information on the game content on the display device when the operation of the player is detected by the operation means;
And position determining means for determining the position of the movable decorative portion according to the state of the sensor of the position detecting means.
The guidance information display means is
When the operation means of the player is detected by the operation means, the guidance information is not displayed on the display device, and the state of the sensor of the position detection means indicates the guidance information on the display device If it is not possible, the guidance information is not displayed on the display device.
When the operation means of the player is detected by the operation means, the guidance information is not displayed on the display device, and the state of the sensor of the position detection means indicates the guidance information on the display device If possible, the guidance information is displayed on the display device ;
The gaming machine characterized in that the state where the state of the sensor of the position detection means can not display the guidance information on the display device includes a state where it is determined that the movable decorative portion is abnormal . The start-up operation confirmation means moves the movable decoration unit with the exclusive-use article movable data for confirming the movement of the movable decoration unit only once at the time of start-up, and detects the position after the movement operation is completed. If the state of one or more of the sensors of the means is the state of the sensor determined to be a normal position, it is determined that the operation of the movable decorative portion has ended normally, and all of the one or more of the position detection means The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein if any one of the sensor states is detected as abnormal, it is determined that the operation of the movable decorative portion has not ended normally . The control means is movable data for moving the guidance information to a position where the display information can be displayed at the end of the moving operation of the movable decorative portion, and the movable portion is movable according to the item movable data If the state of the sensor of the position determination means at the end of the moving operation of the movable decorative portion causes the decorative portion to move, the movable decorative portion is not moved. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising correction movement means for moving the guidance information to a position where it can be displayed on the display device. The control means further includes operation monitoring means for monitoring the operation of the movable decorative portion when the movable decorative portion ends a predetermined moving operation.
Wherein when the guidance information on the display device is displayed, Ri displayable state der the state of the sensor is the guidance information on the display device of the position detecting means is also in the operation monitoring means, said display The apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3 , wherein when the guidance information is not displayed on the apparatus, the operation monitoring means may detect an abnormality of the movable decorative portion. The gaming machine described.

Images